AWAITED IMAM by laila hashmi

The Awaited Imām Mahdī ()

Dr Muhammad Tahir-ul-Qadri

Minhaj-ul-Quran Publications Lah ore, Pakistan I

Copyr ight © 2003 by Minh aj- ul-Quran Intern ationa l, L ahore, Pak istan . All r ights re serve d. No pa rt of this book may be use d or rep ro duce d in any manner wh atsoev er witho ut pr ior p erm ission, exc ept in ca se of brief quotation s e m bo die d in cr itica l artic le s an d rev ie ws. Re se arch Assistant s: Prof Iftikha r A. Sh eikh, Ja we d I qba l, M . Faroo q Ran a Wor d pro ce sse d By : Ba sir Ah ma d, M. Faroo q Rana è T he entir e in come o f a ll o f Dr M uhamm a d T ahir- ulQa dr i’s books, re cor de d a udio/v ideo ca ssettes & CD s of h is lecture s/a ddre sse s, is de dicate d on his beh alf to M inha j- ul-Qur an Intern ationa l.

P re se nte d By: Far id-e- Millat Re sear ch In stit ute 366-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e, 54700, Pakistan. www. m inh ajbook s. com Publishe d by: M inha j- ul-Qur an P ublicat ions 365-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e-54700, Pak istan. (+92-42-5168514 , 5169111-3 Fax : +92-42-5168184 www. m inh aj. biz E-m ail: publications@minhaj.biz

Printe d in Pak istan by M inha j- ul-Qur an Printin g Pre ss.

Co ntents P reface

Se ction 1

Imām M ahdī () is t he true Imām and is from the family of F ātimah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬

Se ction 2

The D ay of J udgment w ill not arrive before the caliphate of Imām M ahdī ()

Se ction 3

Imām M ahdī () and Economic J ust ice

Section 4

Imām M ahdī () and the Saints

Se ction 5

Imām M ahdī () as A llāh’s Caliph

Section 6

Imām M ahdī () and Is lamic D ominance

Section 7

Economic Prosperity and F air Distribution of Wealt h

Section 8

Imām M ahdī () will be w elcomed w ith Open Arms

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Se ction 9

P rophet ‘Īs ā  and Imām M ahdī 

Se ction 10

O bedience of Imām M ahdī () w ill be Compulsory

Se ction 11

Circumst ances Surrounding Imām M ahdī’s A rrival

Se ction 12

Imam M ahdī () as t he Last Caliph

G loss ary

Bibliography

Index t o H adīth and Athar (A rabic)

Index t o H adīth and Athar (English)

G eneral Index

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final vi Book\02-Contents (v-vi).doc

 Preface T oday is 18 Dh ul-h ijjah ,1 th e day wh en the Prophet () st aye d at Gh a dīr Kh um after h is ret urn from Ha jjat-ulwa dā‘ 2 to Me dina. Surro un de d by the Comp anion s (), he de clare d while ra isin g the han d of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā () :

. ‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﻓﹶﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ ﻥ‬‫ﻤ‬ Wh oev e r ha s me a s his maste r ‘Alī is h is maste r. T his wa s the dec lar ation o f ‘ Alī’ s spirit ua l sove reignty an d it s uncon ditiona l a cc eptance is bin din g on be liever s till the Day of Judgem ent. It clear ly prov es that anyone who den ie s ‘Alī’s spir itual sover eignty in fact denie s the Prophet’ s sp ir itual sover eignty. T his most h um ble fo llo wer of the Prophet ( ) fe lt that some peop le deny this r ea lity partly o ut o f ignor anc e an d p artly o ut of pr ejudice , wh ich is sp rea din g unne ce ssary ten sion an d disun ity in the M uslim comm unity. Un der the c irc umstan ce s I tho ught it nec e ssary to wr ite t wo pamph let s on the issue of sover eignty an d lea der ship : one title d a s Th e Ghad īr Dec la ration an d the othe r title d The A wa ited Imām Mahd ī (). T he fo rmer is de sign e d to 1. 2.

t he t wel ft h m ont h i n t he Is l am i c cal endar, and the month of t he pi l gri m age t o M akkah t he l ast or farewell pi lgri m age of the Prophet M uham m ad () t he year (10AH /632A D ) before he l eft for his eternal hom e. 1

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

c lar ify the stat us of ‘Alī () a s the op ener of the sp ir itua l sover eignty an d the latter is de sign e d to descr ibe the st atus of Im ām M ah dī ( ), the se al of sp ir itua l sover eignty. T he m ain p urpo se is to r emove the do ubts that have gathere d aro un d the issue an d to m ake the M uslim s a war e of the rea lity. T he sp ir itual sover eignty of ‘ Alī an d M ah dī (‫ )ﻋﻠﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬a re p rove d by the a uthentic had īth- book s of Ah l- us- Sunn ah wa l- Jamā ‘ah, in the form of contin uo us tr a dition s, (that is, the re is un interr upte d ev iden ce to en dor se th e so un dne ss o f the tr a dition s). In the f ir st p amphlet I h ave inc lude d 51 tra dition s wh ich a re f ull a uthentic ate d an d ref eren ce d. T he rea son for this n um be r is that this ye ar I h ave complete d 51 ye ars of my lif e. T herefor e, in or de r to ga in ble ssin gs I hav e h um bly use d th is r elat ionsh ip a s wa sīlah ( interme diation ) in the pr esence of ‘Alī (), so th at this me a gre ef fort is a cc epted. ( Āmīn) In this p refa ce I want to c lar ify the thre e type s of le ga cy ( inher itance ) han de d do wn by the Ho ly Prophet ( ): i. T he sp irit ua l inher itanc e of ‘ un apparent suc ce ssion’ (sp ir itual khilāfah ). ii. T he politic al inh eritan ce of ‘extern al ca liph ate.’ iii. T he gen era l inher itance of ‘r eligio us ca liph ate.’ T he fir st form of inher itance wa s giv en to the mem ber s of the Prophet’s fam ily . T he secon d form of inh eritan ce wa s given to the r ightly- guide d ca liph s. T he thir d form of inhe ritanc e wa s giv en to other Compan ion s an d the Succe ssor s (). T he ‘ unapp arent succ e ssion’ is that fo unta inhe a d of Prophet M uh amma d’ s suc ce ssion which not on ly saf e guar de d sp irit ua l ach ievem ents an d hidden ble ssin gs of I slam , but also intro duce d the Umm ah to sp ir itua l sover eignty, sa intly r ank of qu tb an d refo rmation thro ugh wh ich the Umm ah ben efite d sp ir itually. T he ‘externa l c aliphate’ is that fo untainh ea d of Prophet M uhamma d’s succ e ssion wh ich le d to the

. . .

Pr ef ace

pr actic al domin anc e of I slam a s we ll a s it s e sta blishment a s a pra ctic al sy stem . T his le a d to gov ernan ce an d st a bility of the Prophet’ s d īn. It p ave d the way for the c reation of dif fer ent I slamic state s an d pr actically introduce d the sha rī‘ah o f Prophet M uhamma d () a s a wo rld sy stem. T he ‘ gen era l c aliphate’ is the fo untainh ea d of Prophet M uh amma d’ s succ e ssion wh ich promote d the I slam ic tea chin gs an d prove d the importanc e o f r ighteo us dee ds in the M uslim comm unity. It not on ly he lpe d in the pr eservation of kno wle dge an d p iety amon g th e Ummah but a lso in the spr ea d an d prop a gation of I slam ic mora lity. T he three types of c aliphate m ay be summe d up a s: i. Suc c e ssion of sp ir itual sov ere ignty. ii. Ca liph ate of gov ernan ce. iii. Ca liph ate of guidan ce. Sh āh Wa lī Allāh (‫ )ﺭ ﲪﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬, a gre at scho lar of the In dian Subc ontinent, h as comm ente d on th is div ision of Prophet’ s inh er itance in the follo win g wo r ds:

, ‫ﭘﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺙ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﻪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪ‬

‫ﻓﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺼﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺨﺎﺼﺘﻪ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻁﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻅ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻜﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺭﺸﺎﺩﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻴﺎﺕ‬,‫ﻭ ﺴﺎﺌﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺭﺓ‬ ‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺯﺌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻭﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻘﻭﺍ ﺒﺈﺤﺴﺎﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﺱ ﻭ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻤﻥ‬ ‫ ﻓﻬﺫﻩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺘﺏ ﻤﺘﻔﺭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻜﻤﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺨﺭﻴﻥ‬ . ‫ﺨﺎﺘﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺴل ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ P eople who ha ve rec eived th e P roph et’ s inhe ritanc e a re o f three kind s: ‘Th e first k ind is of tho se who rece iv ed wisdom, p ie ty

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

and inne r enlightenment from h im. Th e se a re the membe rs o f his family and o the r spe cific p ersona litie s. The se cond g roup is o f those who rec eived th e inhe ritanc e o f e xterna l enlightenment from him in the form of v irtuou sne ss, and gu idance . Th e se a re his sen io r Companion s, eg the fou r ca liph s and the ten Companion s who re ceived the great n e ws (of parad ise from the P rophe t Muhammad ( )). The third g roup is o f those who rec eived ind ividua l b le ssing s from h im in the fo rm o f kno wledg e and piety. Th ese a re the peop le who we re ste eped in the v irtu e o f īh sān ( se lfle ssne ss), like Ana s and Abū Hu ray rah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, and the peop le who came late r.’ Th e th ree fo rms of inhe ritanc e o we their o rig in to th e finality of me ssenge rship .1 It may be note d that this division is ba se d on conv enience an d sp ec ia l stat us whe rea s e ach c ate gory of inher itance share s th e qua litie s of other inher itance s of the Prophet (). Ea ch c atego ry ha s, in som e sh ape or form, a re lation sh ip with the other. v In govern ance , Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq ( ) wa s the imme diate dep uty of the Prophet ( ). v In sp ir ituality an d sainthoo d ‘ Alī al- M urta dā () wa s h is dir ectly appointe d dep uty. v In guidanc e a ll o f his Compan ions an d Ca liph s () we re his imme diate dep utie s. As a re sult, after the f ina lity of proph ethood, thr ee hor izon s we re set up in or der to fa cilitate the eterna l contin uity of the Proph et’s () ble ssin g: i. T he first hor izon is for the politic al inher itanc e of the Prophet ( ). 1.

S hāh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yyah (2: 8).

Pr ef ace

ii.

T he secon d hor izon is for the spir itual inh eritan ce of the Prophet () . iii. T he th ir d horizon is for the e duc ationa l an d pr actic al inh eritan ce of the Prophet ( ). · T he po litica l inh er itance of the Prophet () wa s kno wn a s kh ilā fah rāsh idah (the r ightly- guide d c aliphate) . · T he sp ir itua l inh er itance of the Prophet () wa s kno wn a s wilāyah ( spir itual sover eignty) an d imāmah ( sp irit ua l lea der ship) . · T he e ducation al an d pr actica l inh er itance of the Prophet () cam e to be kno wn a s guidanc e an d hone sty. T herefor e, the f ir st r ec ipient of po litica l inh eritan ce wa s Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq ( ), the f ir st r ec ipient of spirit ua l inh er itance wa s ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (), an d the f irst r ecip ient s of e ducation al an d pra ctic al inher itanc e we re the Comp anion s (). So all of th em wer e imme diate c aliph s (h ea ds o f the ir p artic ular c ate gorie s). T her e is no form of contr a dict ion or r iva lry bet ween the three . T he se con d important po int to be noted is that the tr ue st atus of the thr ee dif fer s with re gar ds to var io us issue s, such a s: 1. ‘ Externa l c aliphate’ is the po lit ica l off ic e of Islam . T he ‘ un appar ent ca liphate’ is exc lusiv ely a spirit ua l off ice . 2. T h e ‘ externa l ca liph ate’ is an e le ctive an d con sultative p roce ss. T he ‘ unapp arent ca liph ate’ is an inher ent an d se lect ive act. 3. T he ‘ externa l’ c aliph is e le cted by the p eople . T he ‘ unapp arent’ ca liph is se lecte d by Go d. 4. T he po litica l c aliph is e lecte d. T he spir itual ca liph is sele cte d. 5. T h is is the re ason that the fir st ca liph Abū Bakr a sSiddīq () wa s e le cte d on the ba sis o f ‘Um ar Fār ūq’ s () p roposal an d the con sensus of the majo rity of the p ublic . But the e le ction of the fir st Imām of sp ir itua l

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

sover eignty — ‘ Alī al- M urta dā () — re quir e d ne ither any bo dy ’s propo sal nor a con sen sus. 6. Demo cracy wa s to be der ive d from the ca liph ate, wh ich is why the Proph et ( ) did not anno unc e who will be the c aliph after h im. Spir it ual le a der sh ip wa s an act of a ssignm ent; there fore, the Proph et ( ) de clare d it in the va lley of Gha dīr Kh um. 7. T h e Prophet ( ) le ft the e le ction of th e c aliph to the will of the peop le , but the spir it ual lea der ( walī) wa s se lecte d by himself by the will o f Allāh. 8. Exte rna l ca liph ate is e sta blishe d to pe rfect the wo rldly sy stem. Sp ir itual lea der ship is e sta blishe d to bea utify it with the he aven ly ch arm an d gra ce. 9. Ca liphate m ake s men just. Sp ir itual lea de rsh ip m ake s them p erfe ct. 10. Ca liphate is conf ine d to the floor (e arth). Sp ir itual le a der sh ip exten ds to the T hrone (of Allāh). 11. Ca liphate is in effe ctive witho ut off ic ia lly tak in g off ic e. Sp ir itual lea der ship is ef fectiv e even without takin g off ice . 12. T h is is p ro ba bly th e re ason why c aliphate wa s entr uste d to the Ummah, an d Sp ir itual lea der sh ip wa s entr uste d to the fam ily of the Prophet ( ). T herefor e, ther e is no e scap in g (room for th e den ia l of ) political lea dersh ip ( khilāfah ; c aliphate) nor of sp ir itua l sover eignty (wilāyah). T he dire ct c aliphate of Abū Bakr as- Siddīq () wa s e sta blishe d with the con sensus of the Comp anion s () an d is cate gor ica lly proven by history. T he direct sp ir itual sov ere ignty of ‘Alī a lM urta dā () wa s anno unc e d by the Prophet ( ) himself an d is cate gor ica lly p roven by muta wātir ( un broken cha in of)

Pr ef ace

tra dition s. T he proof of the ca liph ate is the con sensus of the Co mpanion s () an d the proof of sp irit ua l sove re ignty ( wilāyah) is the dec lar ation of the Prophet () . One who denie s the ca liph ate in fa ct den ie s h istory an d con sensus, an d on e who den ie s the sp irit ua l sov ere ignty ( wilāyah) den ie s the Prophet’ s dec la ration. T here fore, both the ca liphate an d the sp ir itua l lea dersh ip a re ine sc apa ble rea litie s. Wh at is ur gently ne e de d is a c le ar un der stan din g of the r eality of the t wo in stitut ions in or de r to pr esent conform ity r ather than diff eren ce ( cla sh) bet we en the t wo . It sho uld be un der stood that just a s the externa l c aliphate starte d with the right ly- guide d ca liph s an d its ble ssin gs wer e pa sse d on to the r ighteo us an d just r uler s, sim ilar ly the unapp arent c aliphate ( sp irit ua l sover eignty) st arte d with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā () an d it s ble ssin gs we re pa sse d on to the me m ber s of the Prophet’ s fam ily an d pe rfecte d sa ints of the Umm ah. By mean s of the de claration — ‫ﻭﻻ ﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﻓﹶﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ﻥ‬‫ ( ﻤ‬who ever ha s m e a s his ma ster ‘Alī is h is ma ster) — an d — ‫ ﻭﻟ ﻴﻜ ﻡ ﻤ ﻥ ﺒﻌ ﺩﻱ‬‫ ‘( ﻋﻠ ﻲ‬Alī is yo ur sp ir itual le a der after me ) — the Prophet ( ) p ublic ly dec lar e d ‘ Alī () a s the op ener of sp ir itua l sover eignty. Sh āh Walī Allāh (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬in the chapter of wilāyah say s:

‫ﻝ ﺍﹶﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻣﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺗﺢﹺ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.1 .‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ In th is Ummah th e first pe rson to open the doo r o f spiritua l sov e re ignty ( wilāy ah) is ‘A lī a l- Murtadā (‫)ﻛﺮم اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ وﺟﮭﮫ‬.1

S hāh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yyah (1: 103).

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ﺮ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﹶﻣﲑ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻻﺩ ﻛﺮﺍﻡ‬‫ ﻭ ﺳ‬.2 .‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‬ The sec re t of th e sp iritual sove reign ty ( wilāyah ) of the Lead e r (‘A lī ‫ﻛﺮم اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬ ‫ )وﺟﮭﮫ‬wa s pa ssed down to h is ch ild ren.1

‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﻛﺴﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻻ ﲞﺎﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬.3 .‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‬ The re fo re, the re is no t a sing le sa int in the Ummah who is no t d ire ctly or ind ire ctly link ed to the family o f ‘A lī () ( to a tta in spiritua l leade rship ).2

‫ﻝ‬‫ ﻭ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.4 ‫ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻗﺪﻡ‬,‫ﻛﺴﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ,‫ﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻨﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ .‫ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬ The first pe rson in the P roph et’ s Ummah who open ed the gate o f se lf-denia l in ( the most supe rio r and po we rful catego ry o f) spiritua l so ve re ign ty and who took the first step on to this eleva ted spot is ‘Alī ( ‫ﻛﺮم‬ ‫ )اﷲ و ﺟﮭﮫ‬. Tha t is why d ifferent o rde rs ( sa lā sil) of sp irituality re turn to h im.3 5. Sh āh W alī Allāh (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬write s: “ No w who soever rec eiv e s wilāyah ( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) from the Ho ly Prophet M uh amma d ( ), it is e ither r ece ive d thro ugh a re lation sh ip with ‘ Alī 1. 2. 3.

S hāh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yyah (1: 103). S hāh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yyah (1: 104). S hāh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 60).

Pr ef ace

a l-M urtadā () or a r elation ship with the Chief Help er ( Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam) Jīlan ī (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬. No one c an gain wilāyah ( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) by bypa ssin g this pro ce ss.”1 It sho uld be note d that the relation ship with the Chief Help er ( Gha wth- ul-A‘zam ) is in f act a chapte r an d a r ay of the r elation ship with ‘ Alī al- M urta dā ( ). Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī h a s c lar if ie d this po int: “ ‘Alī al- M urta dā () a lso ha s super ior ity in a sin gle dimen sion over Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq () an d ‘ Umar Fār ūq (). T his sup erior ity lie s, f ir stly, in the gr eater n um be r of his fo llo wer s. Se con dly , all c ate gorie s of wilāyah ( sp ir itua l sover eignty) fro m his day till the en d of tim e ar e only po ssible thro ugh h im. He ha s a say in the k in gdom of the kin gs an d the lea der ship of the le a der s an d this is not h idden f rom those who ar e f amiliar with the wo rld of an ge ls… Mo st sp ir itua l ch ain s a re direct ly deriv e d from ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (). So , on the Day o f Judgement, ‘Alī’s army includin g follo wer s of h igh stat us an d great r ep utation, will o utnum ber an d o utsh ine other s to be a so urc e of won der fo r a ll the spe ctators. ”2 ‘ Spirit ua l sove re ignty’ ( wilā yah), within the Prophet M uh amma d’ s () Umm ah, who se fo unta inhea d is ‘ Alī a l-M urtadā (), is dire ctly sh are d by Fātim ah, Ha ssan an d Husse in () an d then through them it wa s pa sse d do wn to the t we lve Imām s ( spirit ua l lea de rs) , the la st lea der be in g Im ām Mah dī ( ). Just a s ‘ Alī a l-M urta dā ( ) is the

1. 2.

S hāh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 62). S hāh Is m ā‘ ī l Di hl awī , Si r āt mus t aqī m (p. 67).

‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪open er of spir itual sove re ignty, Imām M ah dī ( ) is the‬‬ ‫‪se al o f spir itual sov ere ignty.‬‬ ‫‪T he wor ds of Sh aykh M uja ddid Alf T hānī Ahma d‬‬ ‫‪) approp riately h igh light the‬رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ( ‪Sa rh an dī‬‬ ‫‪po int:‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﺍﻫﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺮﺏ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻻﺀ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﳘﲔ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ‪ ,‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﳘﲔ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻠﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻯ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺋﻴﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺴﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﻮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻭﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﮔﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪,‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﲤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﲝﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻮﺽ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﳘﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ‬ ‫‪‬ﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺍﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬

Pr ef ace

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﳘﭽﻨﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﲢﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﲞﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭ‬,‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﻯ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﳘﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑ ﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻏﲑ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﳊﻮﻕ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ And the re is anothe r way clo se to spiritua l sov ereign ty and th is is th e way o f a ll ca tego rie s of sa ints o f all leve ls. The pa th o f mysticism (ta sa wwuf) sp rings from this path and it also in volv e s the sta tu s o f se lf-d enia l. In te rmedia tion is p ro ven in this p roc ess b ecau se ‘A lī al- Mu rtadā ( ) is the founta inhead of from which the Sha ykh s o f those on this path gain a ll their ble ssing s. And th is grand office is re se rv ed for him. On this pa th, th e fee t o f th e Ho ly P rophe t ( ) a re on ‘A lī’s head wh erea s Fā timah, Ha ssan and Hu sse in () share this statu s with him. I b elie ve that he enjo yed this po sition ev en be fore his ph ysica l b irth, a s he did a fte r it. Who soev e r ha s rec eived the d ivin e ble ssing s and guidan ce on this pa th, ha s rece iv ed it through h im, be cau se he is c lo se st to th e last po in t on th is path and the c entre of this spo t be long s to h im. And when ‘A lī’s p eriod ended , the g rand office wa s passed down to Ha ssan and Husse in (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﮭﻤ ﺎ‬. Th en it wa s passed do wn to the twe lv e Imāms in th e co rre ct o rde r one by on e, the la st of whom will b e Imām Mahdī (). Who soe ve r re ce ived guidan ce in their life and afte r the ir dea th, rec eived it th rough th e se sa ints. The se Imāms a re

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

the sou rce of a ll b le ssing fo r e ven the h igh rank ing sain ts ( such as qut ubs and n uja bā’ be cau se the y a re th e c entre of all sp iritua l ac tivity ) and no one can survive without a link with the h eadquarte rs.1 Sh aykh Ahma d Sarh an dī (‫ )رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﯿﮫ‬be lieve s that Im ām Mah dī ( ) will sh are spir it ual sove reignty ( wilāyah ) with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (). T he gist of the disc ussion is that the Proph et’s de claration at Gha dīr Kh um p rove d forev er that ‘Alī’ s spirit ua l sov ere ignty is in fact the Prophet M uh amma d’ s spirit ua l sove re ignty. As the door of prophethoo d wa s c lo se d after th e Ho ly Proph et () , Allāh () ha s op ene d ne w aven ues for the contin uation of the Proph et’s ble ssin gs till th e Day of Judgement. Som e were blesse d by an extern al stat us wh ilst other s by an interna l status. T he h idden aven ue is kno wn a s sp irit ua l sove reignty an d ‘ Alī a l-M urtadā () wa s its f ir st Imām . T hen this cha in of sover eignty wa s pa sse d do wn to the Prophet’ s fam ily an d f ina lly to the t we lve Im āms. Beside s the t welv e Imām s there ar e thousan ds of othe r pio us in div idua ls who r each e d the stat us of sainthoo d. T hey h ave h eld high rank s of sainthoo d ( such a s gha wth, qu tub) an d hav e enlightene d the liv e s of million s of peop le thro ugh the intern al light of wilāyah , takin g th em o ut of ignoran ce an d a stray . Yet all of th em ga ine d th eir spir itual st atus f rom the sp ir itua l sover eignty of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (), be it directly or in dir ectly. No one wa s se lf- suff icient an d in depen dent from th e wilāyah of ‘ Alī a l-M urtadā ( ) an d th is cha in will contin ue up to the Day o f Judgement until the app ear ance of the la st Im ām ( sp irit ua l le a der ) an d the c entre of sp ir itua l lea de rsh ip. He will be Imām M uh amma d M ah dī ( ), the t we lfth Im ām an d the last c aliph. In his pe rson , the exte rnal an d the un apparent c aliphate s wh ich r an par alle l to e ach other will come to gether. He will be the sp ir itual a s well a s the po litica l 1.

S haykh Ahm ad S arhandī , Makt ūbāt (9: 173#123).

Pr ef ace

inher itor, an d h e will be the la st pe rson to ho ld the office s of kh ilā fah an d wilāyah . Anyone who denies I mām Mah dī ( ) will deny both the externa l an d unappa rent form s of I slam. T his will be the climax of the expo sure an d disc losure of the Prophet M uhamm a d’ s ble ssin g. T his is due to the f act that, he will be nam e d M uhamm a d an d he will also r esem ble the Ho ly Prophet ( ) in mora l exce llenc e. So the wor ld sho uld kno w that this Imām is the r ec ipient of both the externa l an d intern al inher itanc e o f the Proph et’s ble ssin gs. T hat is why th e Prophet ( ) said, “ Anyone who den ie s M ah dī will be a disbeliev er. ” At that time, he will be th e fo c us of all saints on earth, an d, bein g the lea der o f Proph et M uh amma d’ s Umm ah, proph et ‘Īsā ( ) will offer his pr ayer beh in d him an d in this way , he will anno unc e h is lea der sh ip to the who le wo rld. So we sho uld r ea lize that ‘ Alī al-M urta dā ( ) an d M ah dī ( ) o f the e arth an d h eaven s — the father an d the son — ar e both Allāh’ s fr ien ds an d the Proph et’s inher itors. It is therefor e comp ulsory on ev ery be liever to a ckno wle dge their exc eptiona l status. M ay Allāh () giv e us the a bility to ga in ble ssin gs from the se fo unta inhe a ds of wilāyah . (Ām īn! with the interme diation o f the L ea de r of the Proph ets ( )). M uhammad Ta hir- ul-Qad ri On e of the servant s of Proph et’s ( ) Fa mily

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 1

Imām Mahdī ( ) is the true Imām and is from the family of Fātimah (‫) رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬ ‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻴﺏ ﻴﻘﻭل‬.1 ‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﺫﻜﺭ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﻘﻭل‬

. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

“ Sa ‘īd ibn M usayya b r elate s that he h ear d Umm Sa lamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say: I h ear d the M essen ger of Allāh ( ) m ention Mah dī. He said: y es, M ah dī is th e T ruth (that is, his appear anc e is tr ue an d immin ent) an d h e will be from the fam ily o f Fātimah .”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻨﺱ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺎﻟﻙ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.2 ‫ﻟﹶﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‬: ‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

‫ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻭﺤﻤﺯﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺠﻌﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺔ‬

. ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

“ Ana s ibn Mā lik () na rrate s: I he ar d the M essen ger of Allāh () say : we, the childr en of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib, will be the ch ief s of the p eople of Par a dise , that is, my se lf, Ham zah, ‘ Alī, Ja ‘far, Ha ssan , Husse in an d M ah dī. ”2

‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.3

. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

1. 2.

Related by Hākim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8671), while Dhahabī kept silent about it. Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:455 (#4087); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (3:211 # 4940); Mizzī, Tuhfat-ulashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (1:86 # 195); and Hindī in Kanz-ul‘ummāl (12:97 # 34162).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Umm Salamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say s that Allāh’ s M essen ger () ment ione d Mah dī ( an d h e sa id:) he will be from the children of Fātim ah.”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺎﺌﺸﺔ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.4

‫ ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬ . ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺤﻲ‬

“ ‘Ā’ ish ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬re late s that the Prophet  sa id: M ah dī will be f rom my children who will f ight (to e sta blish) my sunnah a s I fo ught a ccor din g to the div ine r evelation. ”2

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﺒﺎ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺤﺒﻴﺏ‬.5 ‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬

‫ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‬ ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺱ ﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬.‫ ﻴﺩﻭﻡ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﻫﺭﻗل‬

: ‫ ﻥ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ! ﻤ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻭﺭﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻴﻼﻥ‬ ,‫ﻟﺩ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻜﺄﻥ ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ‬‫ﻤﻥ ﻭ‬

, ‫ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺀﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻌﻭﺍﻴﺘﺎ ﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺠﺎل ﺒﻨﻲ ﺇﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴل‬,‫ﺨﺎل ﺃﺴﻭﺩ‬ .‫ ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻭﺯ ﻭﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻤﺩﺍﺌﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬,‫ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﻋﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ‬

“ Sulaymān ibn Ha bīb say s that he he ar d Abū Um āmah () narr ate: T he Me ssen ge r of Allāh  said: ther e will be pe ac e bet ween yo u an d Ro me fo ur time s an d the fo urth tim e the lea de r of the Roman s will be a pe rson belon gin g to the ch ildr en of Her ac lius. T his ‘p ea ce’ will la st seven contin uo us y ear s. A man from ‘ Abd a l-Qays, M usta wr id 1. 2.

Hākim related it in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8672); and Suyūtī in alHāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74). Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:371#1092); and Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

ibn Khay lān, a ske d the Me ssen ger o f Allāh  : who will be the Imām of the M uslim s at that time ? He ( ) r eplie d: that pe rson will be from (my) ch ildr en an d he will be forty ye ar s o ld. His f ac e will be br ight like a star an d there will be a black bea uty spot on his r ight che ek, an d he will be dre sse d in t wo cotton go wn s an d it will seem a s tho ugh h e is exa ctly like one of the Ch ildren of I sra el. He will r ule for t en ye ar s, discov er tre asure s fro m ben eath the e arth an d con quer the c itie s r ule d by the po lytheists. ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.6

. ‫ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬h a s r elated it from the Proph et  : he sa id: T he n ame of Mah dī will be M uhamm a d.”2

1. 2.

Tabarānī narrated it in al-Mu‘jam-ul -kabīr (8:101#7495), Musnadush-shāmiyyīn (2:410#1600); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:318,319). Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatawā (2:73).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 2

The Day of Judgment will not arrive be fore the caliphate of Imām M ahdī () ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.7 ‫ ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

. ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬

“ Related by ‘Abdullāh ibn Ma s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that the Me ssen ger o f Allāh’  sa id: the wor ld will not se ize to exist until someon e from my fam ily be come s the k in g of Ara bia whose nam e will be the same a s my n ame ( ie M uhamm a d).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.8

.‫ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻭﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬:‫ﻗﺎل ﻋﺎﺼﻡ‬

‫ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ‬‫ ﻟﻁﻭ‬, ‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬

. ‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻠﻲ‬

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ate s that the Prophet  said: one of my ch ildren will be the caliph an d his n ame will be the same as min e. 1.

Tirmidhī narrated it in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:85 (#2230); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b.of Mahdī, 4:87 (#4282); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:376, 377, 430, 448); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (13:284 # 5954; 15:237 # 6824); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (15:198); Bazzār, al-Musnad (5:204 #1803); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:488 # 8364); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:131, 133-137 # 10208, 10213-10230), alMu‘jam-us-saghīr (2:290 # 1181); Abū Nu‘aym, Hilyat-ul-awliyā’ wa tabaqāt-ul-asfiyā’ (5:75); Khatīb Baghdādī, Tārīkh Baghdad (4:388); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (7:23 # 9208).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ ‘Āsim sa id: Abū Sā lih r elate d to us: Na rrate d by Abū Hurayr ah () : even if only one day rem ain s befor e the en d of the world, Allāh will len gthen the day to the extent that that per son ( ie Mah dī) be come s the ca liph .”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.9

. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

“ Umm Sa lam ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬say s: I hea r d the M essen ger of Allāh  say: M ah dī will be from my f amily an d he will be f rom the ch ildren of Fātimāh .”2

‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ‬.10 ‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻴﺠﺒﻰ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻡ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬

‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺃ ﺴﻜﺕ ﻫﻨﻴﺔ‬. ‫ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬.‫ﻤﺩﻯ‬

‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬ .‫ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ‬

‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺀ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬

. ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻴﺯ؟ ﻓﻘﺎﻻ‬

“ Abū Na dr ah narr ates that we we re with Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬when h e sa id: T hat time is ne ar wh en ne ither dinar s nor gra in will be bro ught to the nativ e s of Syr ia. We a ske d: who will impose this r estr iction? Jā bir () sa id: T he Rom ans. T hen he kept 1.

Tirmidhī graded it Hassan (fair) sahīh (sound) in al-Jāmi‘-ussahīh, (chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:85 (#2231); Ibn Mājah, asSunan, b. of jihād (holy war) 3:354 (#2779); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (13:283 #5953); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (9:428 #12810). Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284); Ibn Mājah, as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:454 (#4086); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (12:264#38662); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ulmanthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

quiet for a wh ile an d sa id: Allāh ’s Me ssen ger  ha s sa id that a Ca liph (ie M ah dī) will appea r in th e la st day s of my Ummah an d h e will give we alth in va st quantitie s witho ut keep in g a reco r d of it. “ Jur ayrī, the sub-narr ator, sa id: I a ske d Abū Na drah an d Abū ‘ Alā ’: in yo ur op inion is ‘Um ar ibn ‘Abd- ul‘ Az īz, the Ca liph m entione d in the had īth ? T hey rep lie d: No (this Caliph will be someon e othe r than ‘ Uma r ibn ‘ Abd- ul- ‘Az īz ).”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.11 ‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬ . ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬

“ Nar rate d by Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () that the M essen ger of Allāh  said: T he Day of Judgm ent will not com e until the e arth is fille d with tyranny, explo itation an d r e bellion. Later, a pe rson (M ah dī) will be born from amon g my ch ildr en who will f ill the ea rth with justice an d e quity. (It me ans that the Day of Judgm ent will not come be fore the appe aran ce of th e Ca liph Mah dī) as it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d re bellion .”2

Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2234 (67/2913); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330, 331). Ahmad bin Hambal narrated it briefly in al-Musnad (3:38, 333). Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Bukhārī and Muslim in his al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8669), while Dhahabī confirmed it. Ahmad narrated it in al-Musnad (3:36); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:236 # 6823); and Abū Ya‘lā in al-Musnad (2:274 #987). Haythamī transmitted it in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:132 # 1880) with a sound chain of transmission.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.12 , ‫ ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

. ‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ‬, ‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬

‫ ﻭﺇﺼﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺒﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻘﺩ‬,‫ﻭﺒﺴﻁ ﻴﺴﺎﺭﻩ‬ .‫ﺜﻼﺜﺔ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily, his no se will be po inte d an d high an d h is fo rehe a d will be bright an d sh inin g. He will f ill the e arth with justice an d e quity, just as ( be fore it) it ha d been fille d with tyranny an d tran sgre ssion. T he Prophet ( ) said, “ he will live for ,” then h e stretch e d o ut h is left (h an d), t wo fo ref in ger s an d th um b of his r ight han d an d jo ine d the thre e (mean in g M ah dī will live for eight ye ar s).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.13

‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻟﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﺭﺠﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ . ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬

“ ‘Alī () ha s r elate d it from the Prophet () : he  sa id: If on ly on e day wa s to rem ain for th is wor ld to st ay in tact ( Allāh will len gthen th e day an d) a p er son, ( calle d Mah dī) from my fam ily , will be born who will f ill the wo rld with justice an d e quity just a s ( be fore h im) it ha d been fille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion.”2

1. 2.

Haythamī copied it in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:313, 314) also, and declared the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā thiqah (trustworthy). Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8670). Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:87 (#4283); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37648); Hindī, Kanz-ul-

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 3

Imām Mahdī ( ) and Economic Justice ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.14 ‫ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻠﻙ‬,‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬:‫ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‬ .‫ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  sa id: Mah dī will be from m e (ie from my f amily), his fa ce will be br ight an d shin in g an d his no se will be po inte d an d h igh. He will f ill the e arth with justice an d fa irne ss just a s before him it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d opp re ssion. ( Me anin g that befor e the ca liphate of M ah dī, ty ranny an d exp lo itation sha ll re ign suprem e in the wo rld an d the re will not be the slightest trac e of justice an d e quity.)”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.15 ‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ‬,‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬

.‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  sa id: (Ne ar to the en d of tim e) the earth will be f ille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion an d a pe rson will be

‘ummāl (14:267 # 38676); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fittafsīr bil-ma‘thūr (6:58). Ahmad bin Hambal related it with a little bit difference of words in al-Musnad (1:99). Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4285); Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171 (#5454); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

born from amon g my ch ildren, an d he will r ule as Caliph for sev en or n ine ye ar s. (Durin g h is ca liph ate) he will f ill the earth with justice an d fa irne ss just a s it wa s prev io usly f ille d with tyranny an d injustice. ”1

‫ )ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.16 ‫ ﺤﺘﻰ( ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ‬,‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺒﻼﺀ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺭﺠ ﻼ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻠﻡ‬ , ‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺼﺒﻪ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺒﺫﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺨﺭﺠﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﺘﺘﻤﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ‬

. ‫ﺍﻷﺤﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍﺕ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺒﺄﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻴﺭﻩ‬

“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udr ī ( ) say s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  mention e d a gr eat te st that will f ace this Ummah. A time will come when oppre ssion will be at such a pe ak that there will not be any ref uge for any M uslim. T hen Allāh will r aise someon e from amon gst my ch ildren who will ref ill the earth with justic e an d fa irne ss just a s it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d oppr e ssion befor e it. All those livin g in the h eaven s an d e arth will be ple a se d with h im. T he e arth will pro duc e as m uch a s possible, an d Allāh will po ur do wn torrent ial ra in f rom the sky. Mah dī will liv e in this e ra (of pro sper ity, e quity an d just ice) for sev en, e ight or n ine y ear s. Pro spe rity will be on such a h igh that the peop le at the tim e will wish that on ly if tho se

Related by Ahmad bin Hambal in al-Musnad (3:70). Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8674), while Dhahabī kept quiet about it.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

who ha d pa sse d befo re them an d exp erienc e d m isery an d oppr ession were alive .”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.17

‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬ ,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬

. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬

“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that M essen ger o f Allāh  sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs e qually amon g the peop le an d Allāh will also fill the he arts o f the Umm ah with content. He will r ule for seven or n ine ye ars. T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will be a total en d to goo dne ss ( an d v irtue).”2

Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:465 # 8438); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘ (11:371); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:359 # 1041); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1049 # 563, 564); and Khatīb Tabrīzī in Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171 (#5457). Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uzzam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 # 38683). Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hurayarah () in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876). Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Section 4

Imām Mahdī ( ) and the Saints ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.18

‫ ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻟﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜ ﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

. ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﻜﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺒﺩﺭ‬

“ Umm Sa lamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬n arrate s that M essen ger of Allāh  sa id: P eople exact ly e qual in n um be r to the Compan ion s of Ba dr (ie 313) will tak e the oath of a lle gianc e on the han d of a pe rson from my Ummah (M ah dī) bet ween the Black Ston e an d the Station of I br āhīm (maqām Ib rāhīm). Later on, the saint s o f I ra q an d the abdā l ( Substit ute s) of Syria will also com e to him (to give the o ath of a lle gianc e).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬.19

‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺭﺒﺎ‬,‫ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬ , ‫ﺨﺭﺠﻭﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ ﻓﻴ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﻤﻜﺔ‬, ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻤﻜﺔ‬

, ‫ﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬‫ ﻭﻴ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺫﻟ ﻙ‬,‫ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴ‬ ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ‬,‫ﺃﺘﺎﻩ ﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ‬ , ‫ ﻓﻴﻅﻬﺭﻭ ﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ ﺃﺨﻭﺍﻟﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺜﺎ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‬, ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤ ﻥ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺸﻬﺩ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬, ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻜﻠﺏ‬ 1.

Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:460 # 37223); Tabarānī, al-Mu‘jam-ulkabīr (23:296, 390 # 656, 930); Manāwī, Fayd-ul-qadīr (6:277); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (4:271, 272 # 38696); and Suyūtī in adDurr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (5:241).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻴﻌﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺒﺴﻨﺔ ﻨﺒﻴﻬﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺘﻭﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺒﺙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬

. ‫ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻤﻭﻥ‬

‫ ﻭﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﻭ ﻗﺎل ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﻭﺩ‬

.‫ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬

“ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah ( ‫) ر ﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬, the wife of the Prophet ( ), who says that the Me ssen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: at the de ath o f a Caliph there will be a differ enc e of op inion ( bet we en the M uslim s of Me dina ove r the e le ction of the n e w Ca liph). One pe rson (that is, M ah dī, r ea lisin g that the peop le might elect h im as the c aliph) will leav e Me dina for Makk ah. Some of the r esident s of Makk ah ( who will reco gn iz e him a s Mah dī) will com e to him, an d br in g him o ut (of h is hom e) a ga inst h is will; they will tak e the o ath (o f ca liph ate) on h is han d bet ween the Bla ck Stone an d the Station of I brāh īm (maqām Ibrāh īm). (Wh en the n e ws of his ca liph ate will spre a d), an army will set o ut fro m Syria to wa ge war on h im ( but befor e rea chin g him) it will be p ushe d do wn into the (tree le ss) gro un d at Bay dā ’ bet ween M akkah an d M e din a. T he abdā l ( Substit utes) of Sy ria an d the Sa ints of Ir a q will take the oath o f caliphate on his han d. L ater, a Quray shī (that is, Sufyān ī) per son, whose materna l r elat ive s will be from the Ka lb tr ibe, will sen d an a rme d for ce a ga in st them. T hey will p reva il over the inva din g a rmy an d this will be the Battle o f Ka lb. One who ( doe s not tak e p art in the Battle of Ka lb) ha s noth in g to do with the booty will be in lo ss. (After this con que st) the Caliph M āh dī will gen ero usly donate wea lth amon g the peop le an d make th em fo llo w th e sunnah of the ir Prophet . I slam will be f ully e sta blishe d on ea rth (ie Islam will be dom inant an d a ccepte d all over the world) . Mah dī will r ema in ( as Ca liph ) for sev en y ear s, then h e will die, an d the M uslim s will atten d his f uner al. F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Abū Dā wūd said: som e tran sm itted from Hishām “ nine year s” an d som e “ seven y ear s. ”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.20

,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺸﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ‬,‫ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﻭﺍ ﺒﺎﻟﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬

‫ ﻭﺃﺨﻭﺍﻟﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ‬, ‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل ﺒﺎﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻡ‬

, ‫ ﻓﺫﻟﻙ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻜﻠﺏ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺯﻤﻬﻡ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬ ‫ ﻭﻴﻘﺴﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻭﺯ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺌﺏ ﻤ ﻥ ﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﺫﻟﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬,‫ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬ .‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬

“ Umm Sala mah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬re late s: she hear d the M essen ger of Allāh’ s  say: ther e will be diff eren ce of op inion over the de ath of the c aliph (ie diff eren ce on who sho uld be appointe d a s the next Ca liph . On see in g this) a p er son from th e tr ibe o f Hā shim (fe arin g he may be se lecte d to take the bur den o f the Caliphate) will le ave for M akkah from Me dina. Som e p eople will come an d t ake h im o ut of his ho use a lthough h e will r e sist it. T hen they 1.

Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:89 (#4286); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (6:316); ‘Abd-ur-Razzāq, alMusannaf (11:371 # 20769); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musamaf (7:460 # 37219); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (12:369 # 6940); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 931); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah filfitan (5:1083, 1084 # 595); Haythamī, Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133 # 1881); Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171 (#5456); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:265 # 38668); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58); and Ibn ‘Asākir in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (1:215, 216).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

will take the oath (of ca liphate ) on his h an d bet we en the Black Ston e an d the Station of I brāh īm (maqām Ib rāhīm). ( On h ear in g the n e ws of their alle gianc e) an a rmy will set o ut to war ds them from Syr ia but it will be cr ushe d into the gro un d a s it r each es Bay dā’ ( a p la in bet we en Makk ah an d M e din a). After this, the saints of Ir a q an d the abdā l ( Subst itute s) of Sy ria will ca ll on him . T hen a ( Sufyān ī) pe rson will come from Sy ria, h is m aterna l r elative s be lon gin g to th e Ka lb tribe, h e will de spatch his army to wa ge war on him. Allāh will def eat them, r e sultin g in them fa cin g a cata strophe. T his is the Battle o f Ka lb. So anyon e who ( doe s not take part in the Battle of Kalb an d a s a re sult) doe s not share in the booty, will be in lo ss. T hen the ca liph Mah dī will discover tr ea sure s an d distr ibute them genero usly ( amon g the people). I slam will be f ully e sta blishe d on e arth. Peop le will live ( in this state of pro sper ity an d comfo rt) for seven or n ine ye ar s (that is, peop le will live in pe ace an d co mfort until the death of M āh dī) .”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.21

. ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

“ ‘Alī () re late s that the Me ssen ger o f Allāh  sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily . Allāh will t urn h im ove rnight into a r ighteo us per son (that is, thro ugh His guidanc e, He will ra ise h im to the high e st leve ls of sa inthood) .”2 1.

Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:90 # 1175), alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 930); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:89 (#4287); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:158, 159 # 6757); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘ (11:371); and Haythamī in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133 # 1881). Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Tabarānī related it in al-Awsat and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth. Ibn Mājah rel ated this Hassan (fair) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:454 (#4085); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:84); Bazzār, al-Musnad (2:243 # 644); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (1:359 #

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 5

Imām Mahdī ( ) as Allāh’s Caliph ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺜﻭﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.22 ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ‬,‫ ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻁﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ‬, ‫ﻴﺼﻴﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬

. ‫ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻠﻭﻨﻜﻡ ﻗﺘﻼ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻘﺘﻠﻪ ﻗﻭﻡ‬

‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻴﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ ﻭﻟﻭ ﺤﺒﻭﺍ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺜﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻻ ﺃﺤﻔﻅﻪ‬

. ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‬

“ T hawbān () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  sa id: T hre e per son s will wa ge war nea r yo ur trea sur e. All thr ee will be son s of the ca liph an d yet this trea sur e will not be tran sf erre d to anyone of them . T hen black f la gs will appea r fro m the ea st an d they will wa ge wa r on yo u with such inten sity that no nat ion ha d wa ge d wa r with such a ggre ssion befor e. “ (T ha wbān ( ) say s:) then the M e ssen ger of Allāh  sa id som ethin g ( wh ich I co uld not rem em ber .) T hen the Prophet () said: when yo u p eople see h im, yo u sho uld take the oath of a lle gian ce on his han d ev en if yo u hav e to come dr a ggin g on sno w. In de e d h e will be the Ca liph of Allāh, Mah dī.”1

465); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37644); Daylamī, al-Firdaws (4:222# 6669); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fittafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58). Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:453 (#4084) with a sound chain of transmission and its men are trustworthy. Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (5:277); Ru’yānī, al-Musnad (1:417#637); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1032 # 548); Daylamī, al-Firdaws, (2:323#3740); Kinānī, Misbāh-uz-zujājah (4:204, 205 # 2440); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38658); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Ne cessary

Clarifi cation : I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalān ī comm ents in Fa th-ul-bā rī (13 :78, 79) wh ile quotin g this tra dition: If the trea sur e mention e d in this tra dition is the one ref erre d to by Abū Huray rah ( ) in this tra dit ion:

‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

.‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ‬

“ T he Me ssen ger of Allāh () sa id: T he t ime is n ear when the r iver E uph rate s (hav in g drie d up) will reve al a tre asure of gold. ”1 T hen th is tra dition c le arly in dicate s that the se ev ents will o cc ur at the time of M ah dī’s appe aran ce.

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.23 , ‫ ﻟﻭﻨﻪ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‬, ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

, ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﺨﺎل ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﺴﻤﻪ ﺠﺴﻡ ﺇ ﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺨ ﻼﻓﺘﻪ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻﹰ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍﹰ‬

. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟ ﺠﻭ‬

ma’thūr (6:58); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:515, 516). Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:463, 464 # 8432), while Dhahabī confirmed it. Hākim also narrated it with some different words at another place in al-Mustadrak (4:502#8531). Bukhārī narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 6:2605 (#6702); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2219 (#30/2894); Tirmidhī, al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of sifat-ul-jannah (the description of Paradise) 4:326 (#2569); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, book of malāhim, 4:98 (#4313); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (5:139, 140); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:87,88#6693,6694); Baghawī, Sharh-us-sunnah (15:34#4239); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:203#38398); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:61); and Ibn ‘Asākir in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (7:234).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Nar rate d by Hudh ayfah () that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  said: M ah dī will be from my fam ily . His comp lex ion will be of an Ara b an d a physic al str ucture of the children of Israe l. T her e will be a bea uty spot on his r ight che ek. His app ear ance will be simila r to a lumino us st ar. He will fill the e arth with justic e just a s it wa s f ille d ( before h im) with injustice. T hose in the earth an d the he aven s will be plea se d with h is ca liph ate. T he bir ds in the sk ie s will also be plea se d.”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.24

‫ ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﺒﻐﻴﺭ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ .‫ﻋﺩﺩ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī () r elates fro m the Prophet  that he sa id: Near to the en d of tim e, a Ca liph (Mah dī) will com e who will give the ir due r ights to the peop le witho ut re cor din g it (ie witho ut k eepin g a r ecor d of who ha s rec eiv e d wh at).”2

1. 2.

Suyūtī related it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66); Daylamī, al-Firdaws (4:221#6667); and ‘Ajlawnī in Kashf-ul-khifā’ wa muzīl-ul-ilbās (2:381#2661). Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37640); Daylamī, al-Firdaws (5:501 # 8918); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:357 # 1032); and Suyūtī in adDurr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Section 6

Imām Mahdī () and Islamic Dominance ‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﻠﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻴل‬.25

‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‬,‫ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻤ ﻊ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻟﻪ ﻗﻭﻤﺎ‬, ‫ ﺍﷲ ! ﺍﷲ! ﻗﺘل‬: ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎل ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬,‫ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ ﻻ ﻴﺴﺘﻭﺤﺸﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬, ‫ ﻴﺅﻟﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻗﺯﻉ ﻜ ﻘﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﻴﺩﺨل ﻓﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺒﺩﺭ ﻟﻡ‬, ‫ﺃﺤﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻔﺭﺤﻭﻥ ﺒﺄﺤﺩ‬ ‫ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬, ‫ﻴﺴﺒﻘﻬﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﻻ ﻴﺩﺭﻜﻬﻡ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻭﻥ‬

. ‫ﻁﺎﻟﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻴﻥ ﺠﺎﻭﺯﻭﺍ ﻤﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺭ‬

: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺩﻩ؟ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺍﺒﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻴل‬

‫ ﻭﺍﷲ! ﻻ‬,‫ ﻻ ﺠﺭﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬.‫ﺇﻨﻪ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺒﺘﻴﻥ‬

. ‫ ﻓﻤﺎﺕ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﺤﺭﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬.‫ﺃﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺃﻤﻭﺕ‬

“ Abū T ufay l r elates from M uh amma d ibn Hanaf iyyah that he said: We we re sitting in th e comp any of ‘Alī () that a p er son a ske d him a bo ut M ah dī. ‘ Alī () (p lea santly) sa id: go a way. T hen , co untin g seven on his han d, he sa id: M ah dī will appe ar in the la st day s an d (the dom inanc e of non-re ligio us for ce s will be at such a leve l that) anyone m entionin g the n ame of Allāh will be kille d. ( At the tim e o f Mah dī’ s appe aran ce) Allāh will gather a pa rty aro un d h im, just as the separ ate piec es of c lo ud a re joine d to gether an d Allāh will c reate love (an d unity) amon g th em. T hey will n either fe ar anyone nor will they unne ce ssar ily favo ur anyone (m ean in g that they de al with ev ery bo dy e qua lly). T he peop le who will gather ro un d the c aliph will n um ber the Companion s who h a d tak en part in the battle of Ba dr (that is, 313). T h is party will have a

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

spe cia l super ior ity which was not po sse sse d by anyone be fore them no r will anyon e po sse ss it after them. T he n um be r o f the p eople in this party will be the same a s the Compan ion s of T ā lūt who ha d cro sse d th e ( Jor dan) cana l in the comp any of T ā lūt. “ Abū T uf ayl say s that M uhamm a d ibn Hanaf iyyah a sk e d the a udienc e: Do yo u inten d to jo in th is party? I sa id: ye s. He sa id, po intin g to war d the t wo p illars (of Ka‘ bah ): T he appe aran ce o f c aliph Mah dī will tak e p la ce bet ween them. At this, Abū T uf ayl said: By Go d! I shall not leave them durin g my whole life . (T he n arr ator says) : a ccor din gly , the death of Abū T uf ayl took p la ce in M akkah. ”1

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻼﻟﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.26

– ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻟﻔﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬

‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ‬,‫ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﻴﻥ – ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﻤﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﺘﻅﺎﻫﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ ﻭﺘﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺒل ﻭﺃﻏﺎﺭ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬

‫ ﺒﻌﺙ‬, ‫ ﻓ ﻼ ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻴﺭﺤﻡ ﺼﻐﻴﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺼﻐﻴﺭ ﻴ ﺅﻗﺭ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬

‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤ ﻥ ﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺤﺼﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻼﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻭﺒﺎ‬ , ‫ﻏﻠﻔﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬

. ‫ﻭﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬

“ ‘Alī a l-Hilālī ( ) n arrate s that the Prophet  sa id to Fātim ah (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬: I swear by the One who ha s sent me with the T ruth! Sure ly, the Mah dī of this Um mah will be from amon g (the ch ildr en o f) the se t wo, that is, Ha ssan an d Hussein . At a t ime when the wor ld will be subje ct to ch ao s an d tur moil, roa ds will be c ut off an d peop le will attack one another, no e lder ly will sho w lov e to the 1.

Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:554 # 8659), while Dhahabī confirmed it.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

yo un ge r an d no yo un gster will re spe ct the elderly , then Allāh will sen d a pe rson from amon g the se t wo who will con quer the fort s of disbelief an d open clo se d h earts. He will e stablish I sla m in th e last days of the Ummah a s I hav e e sta blishe d it in the ear ly day s (o f this Umm ah). He will fill th e earth with justic e just a s it was form erly f ille d with tyranny an d per se c ution. ”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.27 ‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬ ,‫ ﻴﻨﺯل ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‬ ‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻜﺘﻬ ﺎ‬ ‫ ﻴﻌﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬ .‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬ “ Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) h as nar rate d: I hea r d the M essen ger of Allāh  say: A per son will appea r from my fam ily who will pre ach my sunnah. Allāh will po ur do wn ra in for h im from the sk ie s an d the earth will disclo se (an d thro w o ut) its tr ea sure s for h im. T he earth will be f ille d with justice an d f airn ess be ca use of him just a s it wa s f ille d be fore h an d with tyranny an d per se c ution. He will r ule th is Umm ah fo r sev en ye ar s an d he will de scen d at the Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul- M uqa ddas) .”2

‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.28

‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ‬: ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺴﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ 1. 2.

Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66,67); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (3:57, 58 # 2675), al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (7:276, 277 # 6536); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (9:165). Suyutī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:47# 1079); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uzzawā’id (7:317).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻀﺭﺒﻬﻡ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺭﺠﻌﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬

. ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‬

‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ؟‬: ‫ﻗﻠﺕ‬ . ‫ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﻭﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬ “ Abū Hur ayrah () ha s na rrate d: My be love d Abū a lQā sim  sa id to me : T he Day of Judgement will not com e until a p er son appe ar s from my fam ily who will con front the peop le until they t urn to the tr uth. I said: Ho w lon g will he r ule for ? He said: Fiv e an d t wo (y ear s). ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.29 ‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬

. ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻟﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ “ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: T here will be a c aliph in my Umm ah who will genero usly distribute wea lth without ke epin g a re cor d of it. An d I swear by the One who contro ls my life! Certa inly th at the dom inanc e (of I slam)

Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Abū Ya‘lā, alMusnad (12:19 # 6665); and ‘Asqalānī in al-Matālib-ul-‘āliyah (4:343 #4554). Haythamī says in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Abū Ya‘lā narrated it and Abū Zur‘ah decl ared the sub-narrator, Marjā bin Rijā’, trustworthy, while Ibn Mu‘īn weakened him, and its other men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1

Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:454 # 8400), while Dhahabī kept quiet about it. Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth. Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331). Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Section 7

Economic Pros perity and Fair Distribution of We alth ‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.30

‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ ‫ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺙ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ﻭﺘﻜﺜﺭ‬

. ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺸﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻨﻴﺎ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () ha s narr ate d that the M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: Mah dī will be bo rn dur in g the la st day s of my Ummah . Allāh will po ur do wn h eavy r ain durin g his ca liphate an d the e arth will gro w it s pro duce in a bun dance , an d h e will distr ibute thin gs e qually amon g the peop le. Dur in g his reign there will be p lenty of cattle an d th e Ummah will be he ld in great e stee m. (After becom in g the caliph) he will liv e for seven or eight y ear s.”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.31 ‫ ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﺯﻻﺯل‬

, ‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬ . ‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ‬

‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻸ‬, ‫ ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ﻓﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺭﺠل‬

‫ﺍﷲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻭﻴﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬ 1.

Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8673), while Dhahabī confirmed it. Hindī transmitted it in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:273 # 38700); and Albānī in Silsilat-ul-ahādīth-is-sahīhah (2:336 # 711).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻤﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺠﺔ ؟‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﺩﻟﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺄﻤﺭ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ ﺍﺌﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺇﻻ ﺭﺠل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ‬ : ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺄﻤﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻌﻁﻴﻨﻲ ﻤﺎﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘل ﻟﻪ‬.‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬ ‫ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺃﺠﺸﻊ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ﺃﺤﺙ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺠﺭﻩ ﻭﺃﺒﺭﺯﻩ ﻨﺩﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﺭﺩﻩ ﻓ ﻼ ﻴﻘﺒل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻨﻔﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺠﺯ ﻋﻨﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻭﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺫﻟ ﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ ﺇﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺸﻴﺎ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﻨﺎﻩ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ﻤﻨﻪ‬

‫ ﺃﻭ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬,‫ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬

. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () ha s narr ate d that the M essen ger o f Allāh ( ) sa id: I am givin g yo u the goo d ne ws of the co min g of Mah dī who will be sent do wn at a tim e wh en my Ummah will fa ll prey to disp utes an d chao s. He will f ill the earth with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s fille d ( befor e him) with oppre ssion an d per se c ution. T hose in the e arth an d h eaven s will be ple a se d with h im. He will distribute thin gs e qua lly amon g the peop le ( ie he will not discrim inate a gain st anyon e). Allāh ( durin g his c aliphate) will fill the hea rts o f my Umm ah with gen ero sity. He will prov ide justic e to a ll ( witho ut any discrim inat ion or pref eren ce). He will ask h is anno unc er to anno unc e that if anyone re quir e d anythin g (they sho uld com e to Mah dī. On he ar in g this anno un cement) no one from amon g the M uslim s ex cept on e p er son will stan d up. M ah dī will a sk h im to go to the tre asur er an d tell h im that M ah dī h as o r der e d yo u to give me som e goo ds. (T he man will go to the tr ea surer ), the tre a sure will say to him : take a s m uch a s yo u want. He will take (a s m uch a s he wishe s) an d will come o ut of th e trea sury . He will, at that moment, be a sh ame d (of his act) an d ( will say to him se lf) , am I the gr ee die st per son in M uhamma d’s Ummah, or he will say to h im se lf that wh ich is eno ugh for other s is not eno ugh for me . ( Fe elin g guilty of his act) he will want to ret urn F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

the goo ds but it will not be tak en back . He will be told that, onc e we have given som ethin g we do not tak e it ba ck. So Mah dī will live for sev en, eight o r nin e y ear s with this justice an d fa irne ss an d distribution of we alth. T hen after h is ( death) ther e will be no goo dne ss ( comforta ble lif e) for the liv in g to en joy.”1

‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.32

‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﺍﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

. ‫ ﻭﻟﻴﻤﻸﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬

“ Abū Huray rah () h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id wh ile m entionin g Mah dī: At min im um, the duration of the ca liph ate of M ah dī will be sev en ye ar s. It c an a lso be e ight o r nin e year s. He will fill the earth with justic e an d f airn e ss just as it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion befor e it. ”2

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.33 ‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬

Ahmad bin Hambal relat ed it in al-Musnad (3:37, 52); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:57). Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:313,314) that Tirmidhī had narrated it briefly, while Ahmad copied it through his chain of transmission, and Abū Ya‘lā also narrated it briefly and the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā are trustworthy. Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that Bazzār had narrated it, and his men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

who controls my life! Certa inly , the dom inan ce (of I slam) will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1

‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.34 ‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟ ﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

, ‫ ﻴﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬ , ‫ﻴﺭﺴل ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ‬

: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬

.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬

“ Abū Hurayr ah () ha s relate d that the Me ssen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah . If (the dur ation of his caliphate is a) short (per io d) then it will be seven y ear s, other wise, it will be e ight or n ine ye ar s. T he pro spe rity of my Umm ah will be at such a h igh, the lik es of which not exper ien ce d by it in the pa st. Ra in will po ur do wn from the sky ( a s nee de d), the earth will gro w a s m uch crop a s po ssible an d there will be no shorta ge of we alth. A p er son will stan d an d say: O Mah dī! Give me somethin g. M ah dī will say him : tak e it yo ur se lf (fro m the trea sury ac cor din g to yo ur de sire s). ”2 1

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.35 ‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

‫ ﺘﺅﺘﻰ ﺃﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬, ‫ ﻓﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬ , ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬,‫ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ‬ . ‫ ﺨﺫ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī ( ) h a s re late d that the M essen ger of Allāh () said: T here will be Mah dī in my Ummah who will be th e c aliph for at lea st seven year s, other wise for n ine y ear s. My Um mah will be so pro spero us in his pe rio d that it wo uld not have exper ien ce d such p rosp erity be fore it. T he ea rth will gro w every form of crop an d ho ld ba ck nothin g. Durin g this p erio d goo ds will be in such a h igh quantity as a h eap of gr ain on th e thre sh in g f loor. So meone will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī! Give me somethin g. He will say : T ake (a s m uch yo u like ).”1

‫ ﺨﺸﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.36 : ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻟﻨﺎ ﻨﺒﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺩﺙ‬

— ‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻲﺀ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ ﻭﻤﺎ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬: ‫ﺯﻴﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻙ — ﻗﺎل‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬, ‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ﺭﺠل‬ . ‫ﺜﻭﺒﻪ ﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻁﺎﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﻤﻠﻪ‬

Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:317) that Tabarānī narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy. Ibn Mājah narrat ed this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:453 (#4083); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:512, 513 # 37638); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8675); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1035, 1036 # 550); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udrī () narr ates: W e a sk e d the Prophet ( ) a bo ut happen in gs a fter h im. We a ske d him : What will h appen after yo u? He sa id: T here will be Mah dī in my Ummah who will r ule for fiv e, o r seven or n ine , (the na rrator is do ubtful a bo ut the corr ect per io d). I a ske d: wh at is meant by this figur e? He sa id: (this f igure m ean s) ye ar s. He said: (his p erio d will be a pe rio d of ble ssin g an d pro sper ity.) A p er son will com e over to him an d a sk him : O M ah dī! Give m e someth in g, give me som ethin g. So M ah dī will giv e h im a s m any goo ds a s h e will be a ble to c arry. ”1

Tirmidhī related this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:86 (#2232); Ahmad bin Hambal, alMusnad (3:21, 22); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:262 # 38654); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Section 8

Imām Mahdī ( ) will be welcomed with Open Arms ‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﻓ ﻼﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻤﺠﺎﻫﺩ‬

.37

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺘﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﻀﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻓﺯﻓﻭﻩ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺘﺯﻑ‬,‫ ﻓﺄﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻭﺠﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺭﺴﻬﺎ‬

‫ ﻭﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺘﻤﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻁﺭﻫﺎ‬ . ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﻴﺘﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻟﻡ ﺘﻨﻌﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬

“ (T he famo us tab i‘ ī ( Suc ce ssor)) M ujāh id h as na rrate d that a Comp anion sa id: (T he ca liph) M ah dī will appe ar a fter the m ur der of ‘Naf s Zak iyyah’ . When ‘ Naf s Z akiyy ah’ is m ur der e d, those in the heav en s an d the earth will be an gry with the m ur derer s. Later, the p eople will com e to Mah dī an d br in g him ( with gr eat pomp an d sho w) a s the br ide is carr ie d to her groom on we ddin g night. He will fill th e e arth with e quity an d justice . ( Durin g his c aliphate) the ea rth will gro w it s crop s as the sk ie s po ur do wn p lenty o f rain . Dur in g h is r ule my Ummah will be ble sse d with so many favo ur s that it ha s nev er been ble sse d before. ”1 Ne ce ssary Clarification: A m an kno wn as Naf s Z akiyy ah wa s M uhamma d ibn ‘ Abdullāh ibn Husse in ibn ‘ Alī ibn Abī T ālib who r evolte d a gain st Abbasid c aliph M an sūr in 145 AH an d wa s ma rtyre d. T he tra dit ion do es not r efer to h im. He re Naf s Z akiyy ah stan ds for some other sa int who will come befor e Imām Mah dī. 1.

Related by Ibn Abī Shaybah in al-Musannaf (7:514 # 37653).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭ ﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.38

‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺍﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬

.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬

“ Abū Huray rah () h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of Allāh  said: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah who will r ule fo r sev en y ear s if the pe rio d is short, other wise for eight or nine yea rs. Dur in g M ah dī’ s p er io d, my Ummah will be so p rosp ero us that it will not h ave exp erienc e d such pro sper ity before it. T he sky will po ur do wn tor rential rain an d the ea rth will y ield it s entire pro duce. Goo ds will be ly in g like a he ap of gra in s on the thre shin g f loor. One man will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī: give m e somethin g. So he will say: t ake ( a s m uch a s yo u like ).”1

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.39

‫ ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ‬,‫ ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻴﺭﻨﺎ؟ ﻓﻘﺎل‬ ‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﻨﻘﺫﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻘﺫﻭﺍ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‬ ‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻟﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻟﻑ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬ ‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺼﺒﺤﻭ ﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ‬

. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬

Narr ated by ‘ Alī () , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet ( )) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (‫ !)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠ ﯿﻚ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬W ill 1.

Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (6:193 # 5402). Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:317) that Tabarānī narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the be ginnin g) through us. T he se peop le will be re sc ue d from m ischief thro ugh us (Mah dī) a s they h ave been save d from po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur mean s (M ah dī) Allāh will c reate lov e in their he arts after the h atre d of m isch ief a s He cre ate d love in the ir hea rts after the hatre d of po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of po lytheism." 1

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 9

Prophet ‘Īs ā  and Imām M ahdī  ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.40

,‫ ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

. ‫ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‬

“ Abū Huray rah () h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of Allāh   said: what will be the state (o f yo ur joy ) at the time wh en ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am will descen d (from the he aven s) an d yo ur Imām will be f rom amon g yo u.”1 Ex planation: It me ans that ‘Ī sā ( ), at the t ime of descent, will o ffer h is pray er s in con gr e gation but he himself will not be the Imām but a mem ber of the Um mah, that is, c aliph M ah dī. Acco r din gly, I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalānī with refe renc e to Abū a lHa ssan Āburrī’ s Manāq ib a sh-Shāfi‘ ī wr ite s: the re a re contin uo us tr a dition s in its support an d ‘Ī sā  will offe r one praye r beh in d c aliph M ah dī.2

‫ ﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺒﻴﺭ؛ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺴﻤﻊ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺠﺭﻴﺞ‬

.41

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬:‫ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

‫ ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬ 1.

Bukhārī related it in as-Sahīh, b. of ambiyā’ (prophets) 3:1272 (#3265); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:136 (#155); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:213#6802); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (2:336); Abd-ur-Razzāq, al-Musannaf (11:400#20841); Ibn Mundah, al-Īmān (1:516 # 415, 416); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad (1:99#315); Baghawī, Sharh-us -sunnah (15:82#4277); ‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (6:491), al-Isābah fī tamyīz-is-sahābah (4:766), Taghlīq-ut-ta‘līq (4:40); Qurtubī, al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān (4:101; 16:106); Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr-ul-Qur’ān al-‘azīm (1:578); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’ thūr (2:242). ‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (6:493, 494).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻴﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻤﺔ‬ , ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ ﺘﻌﺎل ! ﺼل ﻟﻨﺎ‬:‫ﺃﻤﻴﺭﻫﻡ‬ .‫ﺘﻜﺭﻤﺔ ﺍﷲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬

“ Nar rate d by I bn Jurayh : Abū Z ubayr r eporte d to me : He he ar d Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬say in g: I he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh ( ) sayin g: A section of my peop le will not cea se f ightin g for the T ruth suc ce ssf ully till the Day of Re surr ection. He said: ‘Īsā ibn M aryam wo uld then de sc en d an d the le a der of the M uslim s will say : come an d le a d us in pray er, but he will say : “ No, som e amon gst yo u are le a der s over other s. T his is th e hono ur from Allāh for this n ation” (ie proph et ‘Ī sā ( ) will de cline the off er of le a din g the pr ayer due to the h igh status given by Allāh to this Umm ah).”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬

.42

‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ‬: ‫— ﻭﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل — ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ! ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻨﻌﻜﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺫﺍﺏ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺭ‬ ‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻡ ﺒﻌﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﻨﻁﻠﻘﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺭﺠل ﺠﻨﻲ‬: ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺒﻴﺙ؟ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻟﻭﻥ‬ ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ! ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺓ‬,‫ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬

: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ ﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﻠﻴﺼل ﺒﻜﻡ‬,‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ‬

. ‫ﻓﺤﻴﻥ ﻴﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺫﺍﺏ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬

Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:137 (#156); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:345,384); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:231,232#6819); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (4:59#2078); Ibn Mundah, al-Īmān (1:517#418); Ibn Jārūd, al-Muntaqā (1:257 #1031); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad (1:99 # 317); and Bayhaqī in as-Sunan-al-kubrā (9:180).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ates that the M essen ger of Allāh () sa id: wh en I slam (ie the state of the Ummah) becom e s weak, Da jjā l will appea r — an d a fter givin g details a bo ut Da jjāl — h e sa id: After some tim e, ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam will de scen d (from the heav en) an d in the mo rnin g (that is, at pre - da wn ) h e will c all o ut: O peop le! What is stoppin g yo u f rom f ightin g with th is evil pr etender (Dajjā l)? Peop le will say: h e appea rs to be a supern atur al cr eation (jinn), but a s they will move for war d they will see ‘Ī sā  . T hen it will be time for pr ayer, so their lea der will say: O Allāh’s Sp irit: come fo r war d (an d lea d the pray er). He will say : “ Your I mām sho uld lea d yo u” (an d at that time the Im ām will be M ah dī) . Wh en the peop le will f inish the ir Da wn p rayer , they will le ave ( un der the lea der ship of ‘Ī sā ) to f ight Dajjā l. When ‘Ī sā will se e the L iar (Dajjā l), he ( ie Dajjā l, o ut of fe ar) will start me ltin g a s sa lt melt s in water.”1

‫ ﻓﻘﺎﻟﺕ‬, ‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.43

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﻓﺄﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺃﻡ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ ﺒﻨﺕ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬:‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ؟ ﻗﺎل‬

‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﺫ ﻨﺯل‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬ ‫ ﻓﺭﺠ ﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻤﺎﻡ ﻴﻨﻜﺹ ﻴﻤﺸﻲ‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﺢ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﻀﻊ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺩﻩ ﺒﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻘﻬﻘﺭﻱ ﻟﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻙ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﻓﺼل‬:‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ‬,‫ﻜﺘﻔﻴﻪ‬ . ‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬

Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (3:367,368); Haythamī, Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:343,344); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:325, 326#38819); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bilma’thūr (2:242,243). Hākim gradid it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:530#8613).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ Abū Umāmah Bāhilī () ha s re late d (a lon g tra dition) from the Me ssen ge r o f Allāh  in which a f ema le Compan ion Umm Shar īk bint ‘ Abī a l-‘ Akar ( ‫رﺿﻲ‬ ‫ )اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬said: O M essen ger o f Allāh (‫!)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠﯿ ﻚ وآﻟﻚ وﺳﻠﻢ‬ Wher e will the Ara bs be at that time, ( why will the Ara bs not come o ut in support of the Ummah )? T he M essen ger of Allāh  said: the Ara bs will be in sma ll n um ber, an d mo st o f these will be in the Sacr e d Ho use an d the ir Im ām will be a high ly p io us p er son (n ame d Mah dī). When their Im ām will co me for war d for Da wn pr ayer, at that tim e ‘Ī sā will de sc en d (f rom the heav en). T he Imām will r etreat an d give way to h im so that ‘Ī sā can lea d people in the pray er. ‘Ī sā p la cin g h is h an d bet we en the Imām’ s sho ulder s will say : step for war d an d le a d the pray er be ca use the iqāmah was sa id fo r yo u. T hen the ir Imām (M ah dī) will lea d the pray er. ”1

:‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺹ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.44

: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻟﻪ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬,‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺭ‬ ‫ ﺇﻨﻜﻡ ﻤﻌﺸﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ ! ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬ . ‫ ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬.‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻨﺕ ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬

“ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās () dir ectly n arrate s that the M essen ger of Allāh  sa id: prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam will de scen d (from th e h eaven ) at the t ime of Da wn pray er ( fajr) an d the lea de r of the peop le will re quest him : O Allāh’ s Sp ir it! ( Com e for war d an d) lea d us in pr ayer . ‘Ī sā will say : “ yo u are the peop le of M uh amma d’ s Umm ah. So me amon gst yo u ar e le a der s ov er other s. So move

Related by Ibn Mājah in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:446,447 (#4077).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

for war d an d lea d us in praye r.” T he lea der of the M uslim s will come for war d an d lea d the p rayer .”1

‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.45

.‫ ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬,‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr () says that ‘Ī sā  will de scen d after M ah dī an d will o ffer (on e) pr ayer beh in d h im.”2

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.46

.‫ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī () narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh  sa id: ther e will be a per son from this Ummah an d ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam (‫ ) ﻋﻠ ﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬will pr ay beh in d h im.”3

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.47

‫ ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ .‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﺼل ﺒﺎﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻜﺄﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺸﻌﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ‬

‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻑ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ‬.‫ ﺇﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﻭﺓ ﻟﻙ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬

. ‫ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‬

“ Hudhayf ah ( ) r elate s th at the M essen ger o f Allāh  sa id: When M ah dī will appe ar ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam will de scen d an d it will seem a s tho ugh water is droppin g from 1.

2. 3.

Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:478#8473); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (4:217); and Tabarānī in al-Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (9:60#8392). Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:342,343) that Ahmad and Tabarānī had related it and the men of Ahmad were those of sound hadīth. Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:373#1103); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:78). Ibn Qayyim transmitted it in al-Manār-ul-munīf (1:147 # 337); and Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

h is h air. At that tim e Mah dī, a ddr e ssin g him , will say : p lea se come for war d an d le a d the peop le in pray er. Prophet ‘ Īsā will say : the iqāmah wa s sa id for yo u; there fore, yo u will lea d the pr ayer. Ac cor din gly, ‘ Īsā will off er this pr ayer beh in d a m an from my f amily (M ah dī).”1

‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬, ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺴﻴﺭﻴﻥ‬

.48

.‫ﻴﺅﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬

“ I bn Sīrīn r elates that (Imām ) Mah dī will be from this Ummah an d will le a d ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬in pr ayer. ”2

1. 2.

Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:81). Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:513#37649); and Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:373#1107).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 10

Obedience of Imām Mahdī ( ) will be Compulsory ‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺤﻭﺸﺏ‬

.49

:‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ ‫ ﻓ ﻲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺎﺴﻤﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺃﻁﻴﻌﻭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺼﻔﻭﺓ ﺍﷲ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ‬ . ‫ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ‬

“ Shah r ibn Ha wsha b () n arrate s that the M essen ger of Allāh () said: In (the month of) M uh arra m, an anno un cer will ca ll o ut from the heav en: be ware ! Sure ly, ( be inform e d that) such a pe rson h as be en cho sen by Allāh, so listen to h im an d o bey him dur in g the ye ar of upro ar an d turmo il.”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬

.50

‫ ﻭﻤﻥ‬,‫ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

. ‫ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬

“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ates that the M essen ger of Allāh () said: whoeve r den ie s (the com in g of ) Dajjā l, h as sure ly comm itted disbe lief, an d who ever denie s (the com in g of) Mah dī ha s ( also) comm itte d disbelief. ”2

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.51

‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃ ﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ . ‫ ﻓﺎﺘﺒﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬

1. 2.

Ibn Hammād related it in al-Fitan (1:226,338#630,980); and Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76). Related by Suyutī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Uma r (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬n arr ates that the M essen ger of Allāh () said: Mah dī will come an d the re will be a t ur ban on h is hea d. T here will be an anno unc er who will pro claim : this is M ah dī, Allāh’ s c aliph, so fo llo w an d o bey h im. ”1

Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, Musnad ash-shāmiyyīn (2:71#937); and Dayl amī in al-Firdaws (5:510#8920).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 11

Circumstances Surrounding Imām M ahdī’s Arrival ‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻗﺎل‬

.52

‫ ﻓﻴﻭﻀﻊ‬, ‫ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺒﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺤﻤل‬ ‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺩﻴﻪ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻨﻅﺭﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﻭﺩ ﺃﺴﻠﻤﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬

.‫ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬

“ Related by Sulaymān ibn ‘Ī sā (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬: I wa s informe d that the Ark of the Covenant will eme r ge from T a bar iyyah Sea thro ugh the efforts of Imām Mah dī. It will be p lac e d befor e him at the Sa cre d Ho use. When the Je ws will se e this (Ark) , a ll of them except a f e w will em bra ce I slam. ”1

‫ ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻜﻌﺏ‬

.53

. ‫ ﻟﻪ ﺫﻨﺏ ﻴﻀﺊ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

“ Ka‘ b () h a s nar rate d: A comet with a br ight tail will app ear from th e e a st befor e the appe aran ce of Imām M ah dī. ”2

‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ‬

.54

. ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺭﻤﻀﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ‬

“ Sha rīk () ha s re late d: I wa s inform e d that befor e the app ear ance of M ah dī there will be lun ar ec lipse t wic e in the month of Rama dān.”1

1. 2.

Ibn Hammad transmitted it in al-Fitan (1:360#1050); and Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83). Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:82); and Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:229#642).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.55

‫ ﻓﻌﻨﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬, ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬ . ‫ ﻭﻴﺸﺭﺒﻭﻥ ﺤﺒﻪ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﻏﻴﺭﻩ‬, ‫ﺃﻓﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‬

“ ‘Alī () said: when the anno unce r will anno un ce that the tr uth is in the fam ily of M uh amma d  , at that t ime ev eryone will be talk in g a bo ut M ah dī’ s a rriv al an d his love will be f e d into them ( in such a mann er) that they will ta lk of nothin g e lse but h im.”2

‫ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ‬, ‫ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺩ‬

.56

‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻭﻁ ﻴﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺫﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻑ‬ ‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﺄﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺨﻴﺭ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﺘ ﺴﺘﺤل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺭﻡ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬

.‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﻴﺎ‬

“ Abū Jala d () n arrate s: a disr uption will ar ise wh ich will be fo llo we d by anothe r disr uption. T he fir st will be r elate d to the se con d disr uption a s the lac e is jo ine d to its wh ip (me anin g they will be c lo se ly r elate d, either the se con d will imm e diate ly fo llo w the fir st o r their content will be similar ). T hen ther e will be the ( disr uption of) swor ds. It will be fo llo we d by another disr uption in wh ich a ll for bidden th in gs will be dec lar e d pe rmissible . T hen the c aliphate will come a bo ut, thro ugh the be st per son amon gst the peop le. If will come a bo ut wh ilst he is sittin g at hom e.”3

1. 2. 3.

Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:82); and Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:229#642). Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:68); and Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:334#965). Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:531#37754); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:65).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻴﺤﺞ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬

.57

‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎﻫﻡ ﻨﺯﻭل ﺒﻤﻨﻰ ﺇﺫ‬,‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺘﻠﻭﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺎﺌل ﺒﻌﻀﻬ ﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬,‫ﺃﺨﺫﻫﻡ ﻜﺎﻟﻜﻠﺏ‬ ‫ ﻓﻴﻔﺯﻋﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺨﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻭﻨﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻠﺼﻕ‬,‫ﺘﺴﻴل ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺩﻤﺎ‬

‫ ﻫﻠﻡ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻟﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻴﺒﻜﻲ ﻜﺄﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻤﻭﻋﻪ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﺩﻡ ﻗﺩ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﺤﻜﻡ ﻜﻡ ﻋﻬﺩ ﻗﺩ ﻨﻘﻀﺘﻤﻭﻩ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻠﻨﺒﺎﻴﻌﻙ‬ ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ﺴﻔﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ! ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻜﺭﻫﺎ‬

. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Amr () n arrate s: peop le will pe rform the p ilgr ima ge together an d will gather at ‘Ar afāt without the Im ām. So at M inā dur in g the ir de sc ent a r evolt will po unc e upon the m like a do g ( due to wh ich) th e tribe s will po unc e on on e another . T hey will k ill one another until the v alley be gin s to flo w with in bloo d. (In this worr ie d st ate) they will go to the be st p er son a mon gst them to seek h is ref uge while he will be cry in g with h is fa ce to uch in g the ka‘bah a s (the narr ator say s) I am lookin g at h is te ar s. So th ey will re quest h im: plea se come! We want to take an oath of loya lty on yo ur han d. He will say: it is very sa d that yo u have broken so m any promises an d hav e she d so m uch bloo d. So, un willin gly, he will a cc ept their o ath. So wh en yo u fin d th at per son, yo u sho uld t ake the oath on his han d bec a use he will be Mah dī on e arth a s we ll a s Mah dī in the he aven s. ”1

Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:503,504#8537); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:227, 341, 342 # 632, 987); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1044, 1045 # 560); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Secti on 12

Imam Mahdī ( ) as the Last Caliph ‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.58

‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫ﻓﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﻜﻼﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻟﻡ‬

. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻓ ﻘﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺃﻓﻬﻤﻪ‬

“ It is narr ate d by Jā bir ibn Sam urah () : I h ear d the M essen ger o f Allāh  say : I slam will rema in e sta blishe d until t we lve ca liph s h ave r ule d over yo u. T he Ummah will be un ite d on all of them . “ T hen I hear d the Prophet  say (som ethin g) wh ich I co uld not un der stan d. I a ske d my f ather: wh at is he sayin g? He told m e that he h a d sa id: a ll (the t we lve c aliph s) will be from the Qur ay sh.”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.59

‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬ ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻓﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﻀﺠﻭﺍ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬

. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬: ‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﺒﺔ! ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬

“ Jā bir ibn Sam urah () ha s na rrate d that he he ar d the M essen ger o f Allāh  say : I slam will rem ain do minant until t welv e ca liph s hav e p a sse d.” Jā bir () sa id: ( at this) peop le sa id ( lo udly:) “ Allāh is the greate st” an d it bec ame 1.

Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:86 (#4279); ‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (13:212); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-unnubuwwah (6:520). Ahmad bin Hambal transmitted it with different words in alMusnad (5:93, 92, 98).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

no isy a ll aro un d. T hen the Prophet  sa id so methin g quietly. I a ske d my father : O father! What did h e say? (My f ather told me :) he said, “ All those (t welv e ca liph s) will be from the Qur ay sh.”1 Im am Suy ūtī comments on Abū Dā wūd’ s na rration in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :85) :

‫ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﻋﻘﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﺅﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬ ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺼﺩﺭﻩ ﺤﺩﻴﺙ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ ‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ :‫ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﻴﺔ‬.‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬ ‫ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻻﺜﻨﻰ‬:‫ﻓﺄﺸﺎﺭ ﺒﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ‬ .‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬ “ Abū Dā wūd ha s devote d a chapter to Imām M ah dī in his book a s-Sunan (4 :86). In the be ginnin g of the ch apter a nar ration of Jā bir ibn Sa m ur ah () is given . T he M essen ger of Allāh  said: “ unt il t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d, on who m th is Ummah will un ite. ” Ac cor din g to another tra dition, “ this dīn will r ema in do minant till the t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d an d all of them will be from the Qur ay sh.”

Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:86 (#4280, 4281); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (5:93, 97, 98, 101); and ‘Asqalānī in Fath-ul-bārī (13:211). Muslim related it with some different words in as-Sahīh, b. of imārah (emritage) 3:1453 (#7/1821).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

“ In this ch apter Abū Dā wūd ha s r eferr e d to the op inion of scho la rs who be lieve that Imām Mah dī is one of those t we lve caliph s.” T he conc lusion Suy ūtī ha s dra wn from this is that Im ām Mah dī will be the t we lfth an d la st Im ām on this e arth.1 Abū Dā wūd, after intro ducin g the chapter with the se t wo tra dition s, h as in clude d the fo llo win g narr ation:

‫ ﺴﻤ ﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻟﺕ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ . ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬ “ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬that she he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh () say in g: M ah dī will be from my fa mily an d from the children of Fātim ah.”2 Befo re it he ha s de scribe d the tra dition which say s that ev en if on ly one day r ema ins in the arr iva l of the Day of Judgment, Allāh will sen d a per son (na me d Mah dī) from the Prophet’ s f amily who will f ill the earth with justice an d fa irne ss just a s it was forme rly fille d with tyranny an d a ffect ion.

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.59

‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ .‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻁﺎﺅﻩ ﻫﻨﻴﺌﺎ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻴﻘﺎل ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

“ Abū Sa ‘īd () ha s narr ate d that the Prophet  sa id: In the last day s when so many disr uption s will app ear , at that tim e ther e will be a per son ca lle d Mah dī. His contr ibution s will be (ve ry) p lea sant. ”3 1. 2.

Suyūtī, al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:85). Related by Abū Dāwūd in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284). Ibn Hammād transmitted it in as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1057, 1061 # 575, 581). Dhahabī graded it marfū‘ (traceable) in Mīzān-ul -i‘tidāl fi naqd-ir-rijāl (3:126). Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:63).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ )ﺇﺫﺍ ( ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭﻱ‬

.60

‫ ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬:‫ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻴﺴﻤﻊ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻤ ﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬

. ‫ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻓﻼﻥ‬

‫ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﻭﻗﺎﻟﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺒﻨﺕ ﻋﻤﻴﺱ‬

. ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﺩﻻﺓ ﻴﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺎ ﺱ‬

“ Z uhrī ha s na rrate d: when Sufyān’ s (a rmy) an d M ah dī’ s army will f ac e e ach other fo r battle, on th at day a vo ice will be h ear d fro m the sky: ‘ be ware! Sure ly, the fr ien ds of (Imā m) M ah dī are the fr ien ds of Allāh .’ “ An d Asmā’ bint ‘Um ay s sa id: the sign of that day will be that a han d will be se en h an gin g f rom the sky wh ich (a ll) the peop le will see .”1

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.61

. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬

Narr ated by ‘ Alī () , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet ( )) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (‫ !)ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠ ﯿﻚ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬W ill M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the be ginnin g) thro ugh us, an d the se peop le will be re sc ue d from mischie f thro ugh us ( Mah dī) as th ey h ave been save d from polythe ism . An d thro ugh o ur mean s (Mah dī) Allāh will cr eate lov e in their he arts a fter the hatr e d of m ischief 1.

Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

a s He cr eate d lov e in their h eart s after the hatre d of po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of po lytheism." 1

‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺭﻁﺎﺓ‬

.62

,‫ ﻴﻐﺯﻭ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﻴﺼﺭ‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺤﺴﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺭﺓ‬

‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ .‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬

“ Artāh h as narr ate d that a pe rson (Mah dī) will appe ar from the Proph et’s fam ily who will fight in the c ity of Rome an d h e will be the la st le a der (Imām ) of M uh amma d’ s Umm ah. Da jjāl will appe ar in his t ime an d in his tim e a lso ‘Ī sā  will de scen d (from the he aven) .”2 “ Imam Suy ūtī in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :80) after listin g the sign s of th e arr ival of Imām Mah dī, comm ents:

‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﺜﺎﺭ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ "ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ" ﻟﻨﻌﻴﻡ ﺒﻥ‬ .‫ ﻭﺃﺤﺩ ﺸﻴﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬,‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬,‫ﺤﻤﺎﺩ‬ “ All these signs wh ich I have summar ise d from the book “ al-F itan ” by Nu‘ aym ibn Hammā d who wa s a hāfiz (of hadīth) an d on e of th e tea cher s of Imām Bukh ārī.”

Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-awsat (1:136 # 157); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:370, 371 # 1089, 1090); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:316, 317). Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:402,408#1214,1234); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:80).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬

.63

‫ ﻻ‬, ‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬

“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬narr ates that the Prophet  said: In my Ummah, soon, there will be a c aliph who will distribute goo ds gen ero usly without ke epin g a r ecor d of who ha s r ece ive d what. ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.64 ‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬

.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬

. ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻟﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬ “ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that the M essen ger of Allāh ( ) sa id: T here will be a caliph in my Um mah who will genero usly distribute wealth witho ut k eep in g a r ecor d of it. An d I swe ar by the One who controls my life! Certa inly that the dom inan ce (of I slam) will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ecapt ure its lost glory an d retrieve its stat us dur in g his re ign).”2 1. 2.

Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:60, 61). Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:454 # 8400), while Dhahabī kept quiet about it. Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth. Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331). Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.65

‫ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻟﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬ ,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻟﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬

. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬

“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫ )رﺿﻲ ا ﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬that M essen ger o f Allāh  sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs e qually amon g the people an d Allāh will also fill the ir he arts with content. He will r ule for sev en or nin e ye ar s. T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will be a total en d to goo dne ss ( an d virtue ).”1

Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, alMu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunanul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uzzam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 # 38683). Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hurayarah (rt a) in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876). Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc

Glossary :

rad iya llāhu ‘anhu — Allāh be plea se d with h im: use d a fter the na me of Comp anion of the Prophet ( ).

‫رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨ ﮭﺎ‬: radiyallāhu ‘anhā — Allāh be p lea se d with he r: use d a fter the n ame of a f ema le Comp anion of the Prophet ( ).

‫ رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨ ﮭﻢ‬: rad iya llāhu ‘anhum — Allāh be ple a se d with all of them : use d after the nam es of mor e than t wo ma le Co mpanion s o f the Prophet ( ).

‫ رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬: radiya llāhu ‘anhumā — Allāh is ple a se d with both of them; use d after the name s of t wo Compan ion s of the Proph et (), irre sp ectiv e of the ir gen der.

:

‘ala yh-is- sa lām — ( May Allāh sho wer His) pea ce on h im: use d a fter the n ame of Allāh’ s m e ssen ger , prophet an d an ge l.

‫ﻋﻠﯿ ﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﻼم‬: ‘ala yhim-a s- salām — (M ay Allāh sho wer His) p ea ce on both of them: use d after the n ame s of t wo me ssen ger s, proph ets an d an gels.

:

sallallāhu ‘alayh i wa ālihī wa sa llam — Allāh ble ss an d sen d pea ce on h im an d h is ch ildren : use d afte r the nam e of the La st M essen ger of Allāh ( ).

abdāl: pl. of badal. lit. Substit ute s. A per son by whom Allāh contin ue s the wor ld in existenc e as mention e d in the tra dition s. T heir n um ber is seventy, of whom fo rty liv e in Sy ria an d thirty e lse wh ere. Wh en one die s another take s h is place , be in g appo inte d by Allāh . 65

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

athar: p l. ā thā r. lit. re latin g. Gener ally use d for a na rration r elate d from one of the Compan ions, rather than from the Prophet ( ), which is kno wn a s hadīth.

cali ph ate : khilāfah . T his is the po litica l sy stem of I slam, it s h ea d the ca liph /kha līfah is the succ e ssor of the Prophet ( ) in this r e gar d.

dīn: it is an Ar a bic wor d use d for I slam. It is mo re spe cif ic ia lly use d for the re ligion an d rev ea le d book s of the prophets an d the me ssen ger s. It is a comp rehen sive term cove rin g not only re ligio us pr actice s an d r ituals but a lso app lie s to all a sp ects of lif e an d prov ide s guidan ce for it. While madhab (re ligion) is r e stricte d to man’ s spirit ua l life an d dea ls with its r elation ship with Go d a lone .

din ar: an an cient go ld coin. fajr: da wn or e arly morn in g be fore sunr ise ; morn in g pr ayer.

ghawth: lit. on e to whom we can cry for h elp . A me diator ; a title given to a sa int of the h ighe st or der .

h adīth : p l. ahādīth. lit. tra dition. T he say in gs, pr actice an d approv e d tra dit ions of the Prophet M uh amma d () .

h āfiz : lit. a guar dian or protector. (1) on e o f the name s of Go d, a l-Hāfiz. (2) a governor , guar dian of the M akkan temp le. (3) one who ha s memo riz e d the whole of the Qur’ān. (4) one who h a s memo rize d on e h un dr e d tho usan d tra dition s.

h asan: a hadīth, na rrate d by a re lia ble ch ain of n arr ators tho ugh not r each in g the gr a de o f sahīh ( so un d) hadīth, but r ecor ds a comp lete cha in of nar rators up to the Prophet ( ).

Imām: (1) on e who lea ds p eople in pr ayer s; (2) an em inent I slam ic scho la r; (3 ) spir itual lea der of the M uslim s. T her e will be tota l of t welv e such Im ām s, the f ir st bein g Imām ‘Alī () an d the la st Imām Mah dī ( ).

Gl os s ar y

iqāmah : a ca ll sim ilar to the adhān (the c all to p raye r), sa id imme diately befor e a con gr e gationa l pr ayer .

‘Īsā (): nam e o f Allah’ s pen ultimate m essen ger, Je sus. He will come do wn from the he aven s durin g the time of Im ām M ah dī ().

ka‘bah: a c ube- shap e d buildin g at the centre of a lM asjid- ul- Har ām (the gre at mo sque at M akkah) to war ds wh ich a ll M uslims fa ce in pray er. It is a lso kno wn a s the Ho use of Allah.

maqām Ibrāh īm: th e stone at Makkah with in the bo un da ry of al- Ma sjid- ul-Harām , wh ich ha s the impre ssion of the footprint s of th e Prophet I brāh īm ( ). T his is the stone on which I br āhīm () stood wh ile he an d h is son, the Prophet Ismā‘ īl ( ), were buildin g the ka ‘bah.

Maryam: the mother of p rophet ‘Ī sā ; M ary. sah īh: so un d. A had īth with an un brok en chain of na rrator s ran gin g f rom the Prophet M uh amma d () an d app roach in g an er a thro ugh re lia ble narr ators without be in g shādh (o dd) or mu‘alla l (f a ulty) in bet ween the t wo c ross relater s.

sh arī‘ah : lit. roa d. It is a le ga l sy stem of a nation ba se d on the rev elation of their p rophet/m essen ger. T he last sha rī‘ah is that of I slam that r eplace s a ll pr evio us sha rī‘ah s.

s pi ritual leade rshi p: imāmah. T his status will be he ld by t we lve Imām s, the f ir st of wh ich was ‘Alī al- M urta dā ( ), an d the la st Imām Mah dī () .

s pi ritual sove reignty: wilā yah; sainthoo d. A spe cia l spirit ua l stat us wh ich ra ise s the per son a bove that of norm al peop le. T her e are var io us leve ls an d gra des of wilāyah such a s gha wth, qu tb, etc.

su nnah : pl. sunan. lit. the path, way o r a form, the c ustomary pra ctic e of a p er son or a gro up of peop le. It ha s

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

com e to ref er almo st ex clusive ly to the le ga l way o r way s, or ders, statement s an d act s of wor sh ip, etc., o f the Prophet M uh amma d () wh ich hav e become th e mo dels to be fo llo we d by M uslim s.

tābi‘ī: so meone who h as met a Comp anion o f the Ho ly

Prophet ( ) in the state of īmān (fa ith) an d die d as a be liever .

Bibliography The Holy Qu r’ān . ‘ Abd- ur- Ra zzā q, Abū Bakr, San‘ān ī (126-211/744 -826), a l-Mu sanna f, Kar ach i, Pak istan: a l-Ma jlis- ul-‘ilm ī, 1 st e d. 1390/1970 . Abū ‘Awānah , Ya ‘ qūb ibn Ish ā q ibn I brāh īm ibn Zay d (230-316 /845-928), al- Mu snad, Be ir ut, Le banon: 1 st e d. 1998. Abū Dā wūd, Sulaym ān ibn Ash‘ ath ibn I shā q ibn Bash īr Sijistān ī (202-275 /817-889), as-Sunan, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-Fikr, 1414 /1994. Abū Nu‘aym , Ahm a d ibn ‘ Abdullāh Asbahān ī (336430 /948-1038), Hilyat-ul-a wliyā’ wa tabaqāt-u la sfiyā’ , Beir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-k itā b-il-‘ ara bī, 3 rd e d. 1400 /1980. Abū Ya‘ lā, Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī (210-307 /825-919) , a lMusnad , Dama sc us, Syr ia : Dā r- ul-ma’m ūn lit-t urāth, 1 s t e d. 1404/1984 . Ah ma d ibn Ham bal, I bn M uh amma d (164-241/780 -855), a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, L e banon : a l-Makta b- ul-I slām ī, 2 nd e d. 1398/1978 . ‘ Ajla wnī, Abū a l-Fidā’ I smā‘ īl ibn M uham ma d ibn ‘ Abdul-Hā dī (1087-1162/1676-1749 ), Ka shf-u l- khifā’ wa muzīl-ul- ilbā s, Beir ut, L e banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah, 4 th e d. 1405/1985. Albān ī, M uhamm a d Nā sir- ud-Dīn (1333-1420/1914 -1999), S ilsila t-ul-ahād īth-is- sah īhah, Be ir ut, Le banon : a lM akta b- ul- Islām ī, 4 th e d. 1405 /1985.

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

‘ Asqalānī, I bn Hajar Ahm a d ibn ‘ Alī (773-852 /13721449), Fa th-ul-bārī, Lahor e, Pak istan: Dār n ash r-ilk ut ub-il-I slāmiyy ah, 1401 /1981. l al-I sābah fī tamyīz-is- sahābah, Beir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-jīl, 1 s t e d. 1412/1992 . l a l- Matā lib-ul- ‘āliyah, M akkah, Sa udi Ar a bia : ‘ Abbā s Ah ma d al- Bā z, n . d. Az dī, Ma‘m ar ibn Rā shid (95-153 /713-770) , a l- Jāmi‘, Be ir ut, L e banon : a l-M aktab- ul- Islam i, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH . Baghawī, Abū Muhammad Husayn ibn Mas‘ūd (436-516/10441122), Sha rh-u s- sunnah, Beirut, Lebanon: al-Maktab-ulIslāmī, 2 nd ed. 1403/1983. Bayh a qī, Ahma d ibn Husayn (384-458 /994-1066), Dalā’ilun-nubuwwah, Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-kutub-il-‘ilmiyyah, 1 st ed. 1405/1985. l a s-Sunan-ul-kub rā, M ultan, Pak istan: Na shr- ussunnah, n. d. Ba zzā r, Abū Bakr Ahma d ibn ‘Am r (210-292/825 -905), a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, Le banon: 1 st e d. 1409 AH . Bukhārī, Muhammad ibn Ismā‘īl (194-256/810-870), as-Sahīh, Damascus, Syria: Dār-ul-qalam, 1 st ed. 1401/1981. Dānī, Abū ‘ Amr ‘Uthmān ibn Sa‘īd ibn ‘ Uthmān ibn Sa‘ īd ibn ‘Um ar M uqrī (371-444/981 -1052), a s-Sunan-u lwā ridah fil-fitan , Riya dh, Sa udi Ara b: Dā r- ul- ‘ā sim ah, 1 s t e d. 1416. Daylamī, Abū Sh ujā‘ Shīr a wayh (445-509 /1053-1115) , a lF irdaws, Beir ut, L e banon : Dā r- ul-k ut ub- il- ‘ilmiyy ah, 1 s t e d. 1986. Dh aha bī, M uhamm a d ibn Ahm a d ibn ‘Uthmān (673748 /1274-1348), Mīzān-u l-i‘ tidāl fī naqd-ir- rijā l, Be ir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 s t e d. 1995. Hākim , Abū ‘Abdullāh M uhamm a d ibn ‘Abdullāh (321405 /933-1014), a l- Mustad rak, Beir ut, L e banon : Dārul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 st e d. 1411 /1990. l al- Mu stad ra k, Makk ah, Sa udi Ar a bia: Dār- ul- bā z, n. d.

Bibliogr aphy

Haythamī, ‘Alī ibn Abū Bakr (735-807/1335 -1405), Majma‘-u z- za wā’id , Cairo, E gypt: Dār - ur-r iyān litt urāth, 1407 /1987. l Mawā rid-u z- zam’ān, Beir ut, Le banon : Dār- ulk ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , n. d. Hin dī, ‘ Alā’- ud- Dīn ‘Alī a l-M uttaqī ( d.975 AH ), Kan z-u l‘ummāl, Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat- ur -risā lah , 2 nd e d. 1407/1986 . I bn Abī Sh ay bah, Abū Bak r ‘Abdullāh ibn M uh amma d (159-235 /776-850), al- Mu sannaf, Riya dh , Sa udi Ara b: M akta bat- ur-r ush d, 1 st e d. 1409 AH . I bn ‘Asākir , Abū al-Qā sim ‘Alī ibn Ha san (499-571 /11051176), Tā rikh Dimashq a l-kab īr, gener ally kno wn a s Tārīkh Ibn ‘A sākīr, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār ihyā ’-itt urāth a l-‘ ara bī, 1 s t e d. 1421 /2001. I bn Hamm ā d, Abū ‘Abdullāh Nu‘ aym ( d. 229 /884), a lF itan , Ca iro, E gypt : M aktabat- ut-ta whīd, 1 st e d. 1412. I bn Hibbān , M uh amma d (270-354 /884-965) , a s-Sah īh, Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah, 2 nd e d. 1414 /1993. I bn Jār ūd, Abū M uh amma d ‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Alī ( d. 307 / 919), a l-Mun taqā, Be ir ut, L e banon : M u’a ssisat-ulk itāb ath-tha qāf iyyah , 1 st e d. 1408/1988. I bn Kathīr , Abū al- Fidā’ I smā ‘īl ibn ‘Uma r (701774 /1301-1373), al-Bidā yah wan-n ihāyah , Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-fik r, 1419 /1998. l Ta fsīr-u l-Qu r’ān a l-‘a zīm, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ulma ‘rif ah, 1400 /1980. I bn M ājah, Abū ‘Abdullah M uhamm a d ibn Yazīd Qaz wīn ī (209-273 /824-887), Sunan, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ulk ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , 1 st e d. 1419/1998. I bn M un dah, Abū ‘Abdullāh M uh amma d ibn I shā q ibn Yahyā (310 -395/922-1005 ), al-Īmān, Beir ut, Le banon : M u’ a ssisat- ur-r isā lah, 2 nd e d. 1406 AH . Ibn Qayyim, ‘Abū ‘Abdullāh Muhammad al-Jawziyyah (691751/1292-1350), al- Manā r-u l-munīf, Ha la b, Sy ria : M akta b- ul- matbū‘āt-il-I slām ī, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Kh atīb Ba gh dā dī, Abū Bakr Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī, (392463 /1002-1071), Tā rīkh Baghdad, Be ir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-kitā b-il-‘a ra bī, n. d. Khatīb T abrīzī, Muhammad ibn ‘Abdullāh, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-fikr, 1st ed. 1411/1991. Kinān ī, ِA hma d ibn Abī Bakr ibn I smā‘ īl (762-840 AH ), Misbāh-u z- zujā jah, Beir ut, Le banon : 2 nd e d. 1403 AH . M anā wī, ‘ Abd- ur- Ra wf, Fa yd-u l-qadīr, E gypt: Makta batut-tujjāriyy ah al-k ubr ā, 1356 AH . M iz zī, Yūsuf ibn ‘Abd- ur -Rahmān (654-742/1256 -1341), Tuhfa t-ul-ash rā f b i-ma‘rifa t- il-a trāf, Be ir ut, Le banon : a l-M akta b- ul-I slā mī, 2 nd e d. 1403/1983 . Muslim, Ibn-ul-Hajjāj Qushayrī (206-261/821-875), as-Sahīh, Beirut, Lebanon: Dār Ihyā’-it-turāth-il-‘arabī, n.d. M uja ddid Alf T hānī, Shaykh Ahm a d Sarhan dī (9711034 /1564-1624), Mak tūbāt Imam Rabbānī, Lahor e, Pak istan : Nūr Co., n. d. Qurtubī, Abū ‘Abdullāh, Muhammad ibn Ahmad (284-380/897990), al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān, Cairo, Egypt: Dār-ushsha‘b, 2nd ed. 1372 AH . Ru’yān ī, Abū Bakr M uh amma d ibn Hār ūn ( d. 307 AH ) , a lMusnad , Cairo , E gypt: M u’a ssisah Cor do ba, 1 s t e d. 1416 AH . Sh āh I sma‘ īl Dihla wī, (1193-1246 /1779-1831), S irā t mustaqīm. Sh āh Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dih la wī (1114-1174 /17031762), Hama‘āt, Hy der a ba d, P akistan: Aca de my Shāh Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī, n . d. l at-Ta fhīmāt-u l- ilāh iy yah, Hy dera ba d, Pak istan: Aca demy Shāh W alī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī, 1387 /1967. Suy ūt ī, Ja lā l- ud-Dīn ‘ Abd- ur- Rahm ān (849-911 /14451505), ad -Du rr-ul-manthūr fit- tafsīr bil-ma’thū r, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-ma‘r if ah, n. d. l a l-Hā wi lil- fatā wā, Faisala ba d, Pakistan: M akta bah Nūriyy ah Ridwiyy ah, n. d.

Bibliogr aphy

T a bar ānī, Sulaymān ibn Ahma d (260-360 /873-971), a lMu‘jam-u l-a wsa t, Cairo , E gypt: Dā r- ul-h aram ayn, 1415 AH . l a l- Mu‘jam-u l-kab īr, Mosul, Ira q: Mat ba‘ at-uzz uh rā’- il-ha dīthah , 2 nd e d. 1404 /1983. l a l- Mu‘ jam-us- saghīr, Beir ut, Le banon: al- Makta bul-I slami, 1 st e d. 1405/1985. l Mu snad-ush -shāmiyy īn, Beir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat - ur- risā lah , 1 st e d. 1405/1984. T irm idhī, Abū ‘Ī sā M uh amma d ibn ‘Ī sā (210-279 /825892), a l-Jāmi‘-us-sah īh, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ulgha r b-il-I slāmī, 2 nd e d. 1998.

‫‪Index to Hadīth and Athar‬‬ ‫‪Arabic‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺘﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ‪.‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪43‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪39‬‬

‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫‪75‬‬

‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (‬‬

‫ﺴ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪76‬‬

‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‪ ,‬ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﻻ‪ ,‬ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‪ ,‬ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪44, 60‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪34‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﻠﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪57, 58‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪57‬‬

‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪24, 63,‬‬

‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‪ ,‬ﻟﻁﻭ‪‬ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟ ﻴﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻟﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‪ ,‬ﻭﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08‬‬‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬

‫‪77‬‬

‫)‪Index to Hadīth and Athar (Arabic‬‬

‫ﻤﻥ ﻜ ﻨﺕ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪1, 7‬‬

‫ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﻟﻭﻨﻪ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪19, 59‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺕ‪ ,‬ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‪ ,‬ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬

‫ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‪‬ﻟﹶﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻟﺠﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫ﻨﻌﻡ‪ ,‬ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨ ﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ‪.‬‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻟﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪ ,‬ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﺎل‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻟﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻟﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻜﻌﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫ﻴﺤﺞ ﺍﻟ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪56‬‬

‫‪77‬‬

‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (‬‬

‫‪78‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻴﻥ ‪.‬‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪34‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺙ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪25, 27‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪59‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪40, 44‬‬

‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪35, 39, 62,‬‬

‫ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

‫ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ ‪.‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08‬‬‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬

Index to Hadīth and Athar Englis h A com et with a bright ta il will app ear from the ea st. A disr uption will ar ise which will be fo llo we d by another disr uption. A per son will appe ar f rom my f amily who will p rea ch A per son, Mah dī, will appe ar fro m the Prophet’ s fa mily. A section of my p eople will not c ea se f ightin g for the T ruth. A time will com e wh en the intensity of oppr ession. ‘ Alī is yo ur spir it ua l lea de r. At m inim um the dur ation of the ca liph ate of M ah dī. At the death of a Ca liph there will be a differ enc e of op inion . Ev en if only one day rem ain s befor e the en d of the wor ld. He will be from the ch ildren of Fātimah. ‘Ī sā  will de scen d after Mah dī an d will off er. I am givin g yo u the goo d n e ws of the com in g of Mah dī. I swea r by the One who ha s sent me with the T ruth! I wa s inform e d that befor e the app ear anc e of M ah dī. I wa s inform e d that the Ark of the Coven ant

54 55 34 61 47 22 7 39 26 19 16 50 38 33 54 54 79

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

will emer ge. If only on e day wa s to rema in for this wor ld to stay in tact. If there wa s on ly one night left for th is wor ld to stay in tact. In (the month of) M uh arr am, an anno un cer will ca ll o ut. In my Umm ah soon there will be a ca liph who will distr ibute. In the last days when so many disr uption s app ear . I slam will rem ain dom inant until t we lve c aliph s I slam will rem ain e stablish e d until t we lve c aliph s. M ah dī will app ear after the m ur der o f ‘ Naf s Z akiyy ah’. M ah dī will app ear in the la st day s. M ah dī will be bo rn dur in g the la st day s of my Ummah. M ah dī will be from m e. M ah dī will be from my children . M ah dī will be from my fam ily. M ah dī will be from my p ro geny. M ah dī will be from this Ummah an d will lea d ‘Ī sā M ah dī will com e an d there will be a tur ban on h is he a d. Near to the en d of time, a Caliph (M ah dī) will come. No , but he will be from amon g us. On e of my ch ildr en will be the ca liph. Peop le exactly e qua l in n um ber to the Compan ion s of Ba dr. Peop le will perform the pilgr ima ge together. Prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Mary am will de scen d. T hat time is ne ar wh en ne ither dinar s no r

21 24, 63 52 62 59 57 57 43 32 37 22 16 19 21, 28, 31, 59 51 53 22, 31 60 18 25 56 49, 50 19

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc

Index to Hadīth and Athar (English)

gr ain. T he Ar a bs will be in small n um ber. T he Day of Judgement will not com e until a pe rson . T he Day of Judgm ent will not come until the e arth is f ille d with tyranny. T he e arth will be fille d with tyranny an d oppr ession. T he nam e of Mah dī will be M uha mma d. T he sign o f that day will be that a han d will be seen. T he time is n ear when the riv er E uph rate s. T he wor ld will not seize to ex ist unt il someon e from my fam ily. T here will be a c aliph in my Ummah who will genero usly. T here will be a pe rson from this Ummah an d ‘Ī sā T here will be diff eren ce of opin ion ove r the de ath of the caliph. T here will be Mah dī in my Um mah. T here will be p ea ce bet ween yo u an d Rom e fo ur time s. T his dīn will r ema in domin ant till the t welv e c aliph s T hree p er son s will wa ge wa r ne ar yo ur trea sur e. Unt il t welv e c aliph s hav e pa sse d on whom this Ummah will unite. We , the ch ildren of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib. What will be the state (of yo ur joy) at the tim e wh en ‘Ī sā When Islam (ie the state of the Umm ah) be come s weak . When Mah dī will appea r. When Sufy ān’ s (a rmy) an d Mah dī’ s a rmy will fac e e ach other .

49 35 20 22 17 60 30 18 35, 39, 62 50 27 40, 41, 42, 44 16 58 29 58 15 46 48 50 60

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

When the anno unc er will anno unc e. Whoev er den ie s (the com in g of) Da jjāl, ha s sure ly committe d disbelief . Whoev er ha s me as his m aster . Ye s, M ah dī is the T r uth.

55 52 1, 7 50

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc

General Index abdā l, 25, 26, 28 ‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr ( ), 50, 56 ‘ Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 17, 18, 24, 63 ‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Umar (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 53 ‘ Abd- ul- M uttalib (), 15 Abū ‘Alā’ , 20 Abū Bakr as- Siddīq (), 4, 5, 6, 9 Abu a l-Hasan Āburrī, 46 Abū Hur ayrah (), 4 , 30, 35 , 39, 40 , 44, 46 Abū Jala d () , 55 Abū Na drah, 19, 20 Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udrī (), 20, 21, 22, 23, 31 , 34, 37, 38 , 41, 42, 50, 59 Abū Sālih, 19 Abū T ufay l, 32, 33 Abū Um āmah Bāh ilī (), 16 , 49 Ah ma d Sarh an dī, see M uja ddid Alf T hānī Ah l- us- Sunnah wa l- Jam ā‘ah, 2 ‘ Ā’ishah (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 16 ‘ Alī a l-M urta dā (), 1, 2, 4 , 5, 6, 7 , 8, 9, 11, 12, 15 , 21, 28, 32, 44, 55, 60 ‘ Alī a l- Hilā lī (), 33 An a s ibn Mā lik (), 4, 15 Artāt, 61 ‘ Āsim, 19 Asm ā’ bint ‘Umay s, 60 Ba dr , 32 battle of, 26 , 28, 32 83

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Bay dā’, 26 , 28 Black Stone, 25 , 28 Ca liph , 5, 6, 18, 19, 20, 23, 26, 27 , 29 , 31, 32, 33, 35, 39, 43, 53, 57, 58, 59, 62, 63 Ca liph ate, 2 , 5, 6, 7, 18 , 24, 26, 27 , 28, 37, 38, 39 , 40, 55 Compan ion s, 2, 4, 5 con sensus, 5 Dajjā l, 48 , 52, 61 Day of Judgement, 1, 20, 35, 46, 59 Democr acy, 6 E le ction, 5 E uphr ates, 30 Fātim ah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 11, 15, 16, 19, 33, 59 Fin ality of me ssen ger ship, 4 gen era l inher itance , 2 Gh a dīr Kh um , 1, 6 Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam, 9 Hamz ah () , 15 Ha ssan () , 11, 15 , 33 Hā shim, 27 Hera clius, 16 Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul-M uqa dda s), 34 Hudh ayfah (), 31, 50 Husse in ( ), 11, 15, 33 I bn Jur ayh, 47 Im ām, 5 , 11, 12, 13, 18, 22 , 25, 43, 46, 48, 49 , 54, 56, 59, 60, 61 imāmah, see spir itual Le a der ship interme diation, 2, 11 iqāmah, 49, 51 Ir a q, 25 ‘Ī sā ibn Mary am (‫) ﻋﻠ ﯿﮭﻤﺎ اﻟﺴ ﻼم‬, 46 , 47, 48 , 49, 50 , 51 I slamic dom inan ce, 32 , 35, 40 , 45, 57 , 60 Ja‘f ar ( ), 15 Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 19, 35, 39, 46, 48, 62

37, 43,

58,

52,

General Index

Jā bir ibn Sam ur ah (), 57, 58 Jurayr ī, 20 ka ‘bah, 33, 56 Kalb, 26, 28 , 54 tribe, 26, 28 kh ilā fah, see ca liph ate M ah dī (), 2 , 11, 12 , 13, 15 , 16, 17 , 18, 19 , 20, 21 , 22, 23, 24, 25 , 26, 28, 29, 30 , 31, 32, 33 , 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 , 45, 46, 48, 49 , 50, 51, 52 , 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 59, 60, 61 M akkah, 26, 27, 33 M e din a, 1, 26, 27 M inā, 56 M uh amma d ibn Hana fiyy ah, 32, 33 M ujāh id, 43 M uja ddid Alf T hān ī, 10 M usta wrid ibn Khay lān, 16 muta watir, 6 Naf s Z akiyy ah, 43 po litica l inh eritan ce, 2, 4 Quray sh, 26 , 57, 58 Quray shī, 26 Ram a dān, 54 Rome , 16 Sa ‘ īd ibn M usayy a b, 15 Sh āh W alī Allāh M uh a ddith Dih la wī, 3, 7, 12 Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī, 9 Sh ahr ibn Ha wsh a b () , 52 spirit ua l inh eritan ce, 2, 4 spirit ua l lea dersh ip, 5, 6, 8 spirit ua l sover eignty, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 St ation of I brāh īm, 25, 26, 28 Suf yān ī, 26, 28 Suf yān’ s (army) , 26, 60 Sula ymān ibn ‘Ī sā (‫ )رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﻤﺎ‬, 54 Sula ymān ibn Ha bīb, 16 Suc c e ssor s, 2

T he Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī ( )

Sy ria, 19, 25, 28 T ālūt, 33 tasa wwu f, 11 T ha wbān (), 29 ‘ Umar Fā r uq () , 5, 9 ‘ Umar ibn ‘ Abd- ul-‘Azīz, 20 Umm Salamah (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋﻨﮭﺎ‬, 15 , 16, 19 , 25, 26 , 27, 59 Umm Sh ar īk bint ‘ Abī al-‘Ak ar (‫)رﺿﻲ اﷲ ﻋ ﻨﮭﺎ‬, 49 Ummah, 2 , 20, 23 , 24, 25, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38 , 40, 41 , 44, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 58, 61, 62 ‘ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās (), 49 wa sīlah, se e interme diation walī, 6 wilāyah , see sp ir itual sov ere ignty Z uhr ī, 60

Author’s Arabic and English Books Arabic Books 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

a t-Ta ssa wa r-ul- Islāmī li- tab ī‘at- il-basha riy yah Nahj-ut- ta rbiyyat-il-ijtimā‘iyyah fil- Qur’ān a t-Ta ssa wa r-ut- ta sh rī‘ ī lil-hukm-il-I slāmī Fa lsafa t-ul-ijtihād wal-‘ālim-ul-mu‘ sir a l-Ja rīmah fil- fiqh- il-Islāmī Minhā j-ul-khu tbāt lil-‘ īdayn wa l- jumu‘āt Qa wā‘ id-u l-iq tisād fil- Islām a l-Iqtisād-ul-arba wī wan-n izām-u l-misr fil- Islām

Englis h Books 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

‘I rfān-ul-Qu r’ān (pa rt-1) S īra t-u r-Ra sū l, vo l.1 The Ghadīr Dec la ration B esee ching fo r Help (I stighāthah) I slamic Conc ept of Inte rmed iation (T a wassul) R eal Islamic Faith and the P rophet’s Sta tu re Gree ting s and Sa luta tions on th e P rophe t ( ) Sp iritua lism and Magne tism I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Human Life I slam in Va rious Pe rspe ctive s I slam and Ch ristianity I slam and Criminality Qu r’ān ic Con cep t o f Human Gu idanc e I slamic Conc ept of Human Na tu re Div ine Plea sure

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Qu r’ān ic Philo sophy o f B enevo len ce (Ih sān) I slam and Freedom of Human Will I slamic P enal Sy stem and its Ph ilo sophy I slamic Conc ept of La w Ph ilo sophy of Ijtihād and th e Mode rn Wo rld Qu r’ān ic Ba sis o f Con stitu tiona l Theo ry I slam — Th e S tate Re lig ion Lega l Chara cte r of I slamic Punishmen ts Lega l Stru ctu re o f I slamic Punishments Cla ssifica tion o f I slamic Punishments I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Punishmen ts I slamic Conc ept of Crime Qu r’ān on Creation and Expan sion of Unive rse Crea tion and Evo lution o f th e Unive rse Crea tion o f Man I slam on preven tion of Hea rt Disea se s

The Author D R. T A HI R -U L-Q AD RI is i n need of no introducti on to thos e affi li at ed to t he many fi el ds, whi ch he has m as t ered duri ng a s m all peri od of t im e. He is the founding l eader of M i nhaj-ul Quran Int ernat ional (MQ I ), whi ch i s bas ed i n over 80 countri es of t he worl d. It s m ain aims are working for global peace and hum an rights, revivi ng Is l ami c values, t eachi ngs and tradit ions and s t riving for t he unit y of t he Umm ah t hrough a s oci al, educati onal and polit i cal st ruggl e. As Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is pres ent ing the t rue peaceful m ess age of Is l am pure from i nnovations added int o i t and i nt ernal and ext ernal politi cal i nfl uences, his work, m es s age and call are accept ed wit h open arm s. The m ai n reasons bei ng t hat he has port rayed Is l am as a t ruly moderat e fai th i n i ts origi nal form, free from any form of extremis m, fanati cis m and t errori sm. As part of hi s vast s t ruggl e for equalit y, equit y and equal hum an ri ghts for all, he has writt en over t wo hundred and fi ft y books on all ki nds of m odern, rel igi ous, s pi rit ual and s ecul ar is sues in Engl is h, Urdu and Arabi c. Dr. T ahir-ul -Qadri i s accept ed as one of t he hi ghest authoriti es in t he worl d on Isl am, Isl am and the W est, Isl am and S ci ence and m any ot her s ubj ects, whi ch is why he has delivered thous ands of l ectures i n i nt ernat ional conferences, uni versit i es and insti tut ions all over the world on all t ypes of i ss ues. Alt hough he i s a s chol ar and a reli gi ous l eader for whom t here i s no m at ch, his educati onal, s oci al and poli ti cal effort s have als o penet rat ed s oci et y. He is l eading a peaceful m ovem ent i n P akis t an t o liberat e t he poor from the corrupt ruling eli te, whi ch has ruled t he count ry over t he l as t hal f century. He is l eading t his revolt by get ti ng the poor and downtrodden s egm ents of s oci et y behind him. In doi ng s o he form ed hi s own polit ical party i n 1989 by t he nam e of â&#x20AC;&#x153; Pakist an Awami T ehreekâ&#x20AC;? (P akist an Popul ar M ovem ent ), which has been carrying out t his s truggl e in t he politi cal and

el ect oral arenas. Unli ke any other reli gi ous or poli ti cal personalit y, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri and his mi ssi on have at tract ed peopl e from varyi ng s ects and religions. He and his organis ati on are the sol e hope for i nt er-s ect and int erfai th peace, harmony and unit y. His i mm ens e achievem ents in the fi el d of education and wel fare have been i nt ernati onal ly recogni s ed by the m any int ernati onal awards he has received. In a growi ng int ernati onal atm os phere of ant i-Isl ami sm, pol iti cal confli ct s bet ween W est ern and M usl im count ri es and t he dis t ance bet ween t he W es t and Isl am s eem ing to be i ncreasi ng, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is t he one m an who can bri dge t he gap bet ween t he W est and Isl am. Not onl y can he sol ve the probl ems of t he Musli m worl d but i n doi ng s o he will al so s ol ve the probl ems faced by W est ern nati ons. If you wish to l earn m ore about hi m and hi s organi s ati on or woul d l ike to join his peaceful movem ent t hen do not hesi t at e t o cont act us on the cont act det ai ls given bel ow:

Dr. Tahir-ul-Qadri B orn : PhD: MQ I: PAT: B ooks: L ectu res :

F eb. 19, 1951 in Jhang, P akis tan F rom Punj ab Universit y, P aki st an in 1986. F ounded Mi nhaj -ul -Quran Int ernat ional i n 1981. F ounded the poli ti cal party, P akist an Awam i T ehreek (PA T ) in 1989. Over 250 publ ished. Over 5000 avai l abl e on Vi deo/ Audi o cas s ett es and VC Ds.

Minhaj-ul-Q uran Inte rnational (MQ I) : 365-M, M odel Town, Lahore, P akist an P hone: 0092-42-111-140-140 F ax: 0092-42-5168184 htt p:// www.mi nhaj. org htt p:// www.pat. com.pk Em ail : t ehreek@minhaj. org

Dire cto rate of Fo reign Affairs MQ I: T el: 0092-42-5171404, F ax: 0092-42-5169114, Em ail : dfa@mi nhaj. org

Dr. Tahir-ul-Q adri: Em ail : qadri@minhaj. org